2012 chevy colorado owners manual baltimore, maryland

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual - 2012

2012 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-26Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-36

Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-38Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-47Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-67

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

jrubino

Stamp


2012 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-19Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andCOLORADO are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20901233 B Second Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

J : OnStar® Hands-Free Phone

J : Brake System WarningLight

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-18Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-18Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-18Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑3.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑2.

C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑7.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

E. Passenger Side Airbag. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑20.

F. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑5(If Equipped).

Exterior Cargo Lamps onpage 6‑5.

G. Parking Brake on page 9‑45.

H. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑13.

I. Horn on page 5‑2.

J. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑48.

Four-Wheel Drive onpage 10‑30.

K. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

L. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

M. Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

N. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.


1-4 In Brief

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used to lockand unlock the doors from up to 9 m(30 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press UNLOCK to unlock the doorsand press LOCK to lock them.

PressL to sound the horn and toflash the exterior lamps for30 seconds.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑20.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Door Locks

Manual Door Locks

Lock or unlock the doors from theoutside with the key in the driver orfront passenger door or press theLOCK or UNLOCK button on theRemote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

From inside the vehicle, move thelever on the door forward orrearward to lock or unlock the door.

Seeing the red line on the leverindicates the door is unlock.


In Brief 1-5

Power Door Locks

Vehicles with power door locks, theswitches are located on the frontdoor armrests.

Press L to lock the doors.

Press U to unlock the doors.

For more information see:. Door Locks on page 2‑5.. Power Door Locks on page 2‑6.

Safety Locks (Crew Cab)

If the vehicle is a crew cab model, itmay have rear door safety locks onthe rear doors. With this feature, therear doors are locked so theycannot be opened from the inside.

The rear door safety locks arelocated on the inside edge of eachrear door below the safety locklabel.

For more information, see SafetyLocks (Crew Cab) on page 2‑6.

Tailgate

Open the tailgate by pulling up onthe outside handle while pulling thetailgate down.

On vehicles with a locking tailgate,use the ignition key to unlock it.

For more information see Tailgateon page 2‑8.


1-6 In Brief

Windows

Manual Windows

Use the window crank to open andclose each window.

Power Windows

Regular Cab Shown, Crew CabSimilar

Push the switch down to open thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to close it.

See Manual Windows on page 2‑17or Power Windows on page 2‑17.

Express-Down Window

Windows with an express-downfeature allow the window to belowered fully without pressing andholding the switch. Press the front ofthe switch to the first position, andthe window opens a small amount.Press the switch down fully and thewindow goes all the way down.

To stop the window while it islowering, pull up the front of theswitch.


In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front of theseat cushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to make sure it is locked inplace.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3for more information.

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if available:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

Use the vertical control to adjust theseatback.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3 and Reclining Seatbackson page 3‑4 for more information.

Power Lumbar

If available, press and hold the frontor rear of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support. Releasethe control when the level of supportis reached.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.


1-8 In Brief

Heated Seats

If available, the switches are on theoutboard sides of the front seats. Tooperate, the ignition must be on.. Press the top of the switch for

the high setting.. Press the bottom of the switch

for the low setting.. Put the switch in the center

position to turn this feature off.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑11.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑12.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑13.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑43.


In Brief 1-9

Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing system,if equipped, will turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. The driverairbags are not affected by this.

If the vehicle has one of thepassenger airbag status indicatorspictured in the following illustrations,then the vehicle has a passengersensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑27 for important information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with outside power mirrorshave controls on the driver doorarmrest.


1-10 In Brief

To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch to theL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror to the desireddirection.

3. Return the selector switch to thecenter position once the mirrorsare adjusted.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑14.

Vehicles with manual outsidemirrors can be adjusted by pressingthe mirror up and down and left andright so that you can see a clearview behind you.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn to its original position.

See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑14.

Interior Mirror

On vehicles with a manual insiderearview mirror, the mirror can beadjusted by holding it in the centerto move it for a clear view behindyou. To avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you, push the tabforward for daytime use and pull itfor nighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑15.

The automatic dimming insiderearview mirror will automaticallyreduce the glare of lights frombehind the vehicle.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑15.


In Brief 1-11

Steering WheelAdjustment

The steering wheel adjustment leveris located on the left side of thesteering wheel.

To adjust:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened.

To manually turn on the domelamps, turn the thumbwheel, locatednext to the exterior lamps control, allthe way up. The cargo lamps maycome on, if the vehicle is equippedwith Bluetooth. In this position, thelamps remain on whether a door isopened or closed.

Reading Lamps

Press the lens on the lamps to turneach reading lamp on or off.

These lamps will not come on withthe dome lamps.

For more information see:. “Dome Lamp Override” under

Dome Lamps on page 6‑6.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑6.. Exit Lighting on page 6‑7.


1-12 In Brief

Exterior Lighting

O : Turns off all exterior lampsincluding the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

AUTO: Automatic operation of theheadlamps and other exterior lampsat normal brightness.

; : Manual operation of theparking lamps and other exteriorlamps.

5 : Manual operation of theheadlamps and other exteriorlamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑3.. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6‑3.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.. Exterior Cargo Lamps on

page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

8: For a single wipe, move theband to8 and then release it. For

several wipes, hold the band on8longer.


In Brief 1-13

N: For adjustable interval wipes,turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

6: For slow wipes, turn theband to the first solid position pastthe delay settings.

1: For fast wipes, turn the band tothe second solid position past thedelay settings.

9: Use to turn the wipers off.

Windshield Washer: Push thepaddle on top of the turn signal/lanechange lever to spray washer fluidon the windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑2.

Climate Controls

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Air Recirculation

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.


1-14 In Brief

Four-Wheel DriveFour-wheel drive sends enginepower to all four wheels for extratraction.

The transfer case buttons arelocated to the right of the steeringwheel on the instrument panel.

Use these buttons to shift into andout of four-wheel drive.

2 m (Two-Wheel High): Use fordriving in most street and highwaysituations.

{ WARNING

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake onpage 9‑45.

N (Neutral): Use the N (Neutral)position only when towing thevehicle. See Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10‑91.

4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use whenextra traction is needed in mostoff-road situations.

4 n (Four-Wheel Low): Use thisposition to deliver extra torque to allfour wheels. Used for extreme off‐road conditions. See Four-WheelDrive on page 9‑40.


In Brief 1-15

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)

PWR: Press to turn the system onand off.

q VOL r : Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1, or XM2(if equipped). The selectiondisplays.

q TUNE r : Turn to select radiostations.

q SEEK r : Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment on page 7‑1.

Setting Preset Stations

Radio stations are stored aspresets.

For vehicles with an XM radio, amaximum of 30 stations can bestored as presets using the sixnumbered pushbuttons.

If the radio does not have XM, up to18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, andsix AM), can be programmed on thesix numbered buttons.

See “Setting Preset Stations” underOperation on page 7‑3.


1-16 In Brief

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theradio with CD (MP3/WMA):

Press and hold the HR button untilthe correct hour displays. Press andhold the MN button until the correctminute displays. The time can beset with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with anFM station broadcasting Radio DataSystem (RDS) information, pressand hold the HR and MN buttons atthe same time until RDS TIMEdisplays. To accept this time, pressand hold the HR and MN buttons, atthe same time, for anothertwo seconds. If the time is notavailable from the station, NOUPDAT (update) displays.

RDS time is broadcast once aminute. After tuning to an RDSbroadcast station, it could take afew minutes for the time to update.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock on page 5‑4.

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces.XM satellite radio has a wide varietyof programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑11.

Cruise Control

The cruise controls are located atthe end of the multifunction lever.

9: Turns the system off.

R : Turns the system on.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use tomake the vehicle accelerate orresume a previously set speed.

rT (Set): Press the button atthe end of the lever to set thespeed.

For more information, see CruiseControl on page 9‑50.


In Brief 1-17

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC is located on theinstrument panel cluster. It displaysthe status of many vehicle systemsand enables some features to bepersonalized.

Use the trip reset stem located onthe instrument panel cluster to scrollthrough the available functions. Formore information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑20.

Vehicle Personalization

Some vehicle features can bepersonalized through the DIC.These features include:. Language: English, Spanish,

or French. Automatic Door Locks. RKE Feedback

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑20.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle may have an accessorypower outlet located below theclimate control system and on therear of the center console.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton d on the instrument

panel. g illuminates and theappropriate DIC message isdisplayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑26.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnon traction control.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑47.


1-18 In Brief

StabiliTrak® SystemThe StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem turns on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and StabiliTrak, press and holdthe TCS/StabiliTrak button duntil g illuminates and theappropriate DIC message isdisplayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑26.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnon both systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑48.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑19. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑56.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter.


In Brief 1-19

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press and release the stem inthe lower center of theinstrument cluster until the OILLIFE message is displayed.

3. Once the alternating OIL LIFEand RESET messages appear,press and hold the stem untilseveral beeps sound. Thisconfirms that the oil life systemhas been reset.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for moreinformation.


1-20 In Brief

Roadside Assistance and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center (U.S. andCanada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:

U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on“Owners,” then “Manage MyChevrolet/Owners Login”)

Canada: chevroletowner.ca

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveAdvisors to provide a wide range ofsafety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensorsautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar Advisor to verify youraccount information and to answerquestions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are available onall vehicles. For more information,


In Brief 1-21

see the OnStar Owner's Guide; visitwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) orTTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQ to speak with an OnStar Advisor24 hours a day, seven days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar GloveBox Kit.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wireless

service provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar'sservice. Service involving locationinformation about your vehiclecannot work unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle must have aworking electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment is not properlyinstalled or you have not maintainedit even if your vehicle is in goodworking order and in compliancewith all government regulations.If you try to add, connect, or modifyany equipment or software in yourvehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyondOnStar's control may preventservice to you, such as hills, tallbuildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of your vehicle, damage

to important parts of your vehicle ina crash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑22 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar Advisor cannot beheard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. PushQand request a vehicle diagnostic.If the light appears clear (no lightappears), your OnStar subscriptionhas expired and all services havebeen deactivated. PushQ toconfirm that the OnStar equipmentis active.


1-22 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety Locks (Crew Cab) . . . . . 2-6

DoorsRear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer Operation(PASS-Key III+Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Immobilizer Operation(Passlock U.S. Only) . . . . . . . 2-13

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-15Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignition,all door locks, and the tailgate.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin your vehicle.

If locked out of your vehicle, call theRoadside Assistance Center. SeeRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStar® onpage 1‑20.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑22 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.



If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationVehicles with Remote KeylessEntry (RKE), transmitter functionswork up to 9 m (30 ft) away from thevehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

UNLOCK: Press to unlock thedriver door and turn on the interiorlamps. The parking lamps may flashand the horn may sound.

Press UNLOCK again withinthree seconds and all of the doorsunlock.



LOCK: Press to lock all the doors.The parking lamps may flash andthe horn may sound.

If a door is open or ajar when LOCKis pressed, the horn soundsseveral times to let you know thedoors did not lock and the contenttheft‐deterrent system is not armed.Pressing LOCK again while the hornis sounding or within three secondsafter the horn stops sounding, thedoors lock but the contenttheft‐deterrent system does not armuntil the opened door is closed.

Different feedback modes can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See“Remote Keyless Entry Feedback”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑20.

L (Panic): Press to make thehorn sound and the headlamps andtaillamps flash for up to 30 seconds.To turn them off wait for 30 seconds,or press L again, or start thevehicle.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to fourtransmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted in theslot between the covers of thetransmitter housing.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery. Replacewith a CR2032 or equivalentbattery.

4. Put the transmitter backtogether.



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the door from theoutside, use the key in the driver orfront passenger door or press theLOCK or UNLOCK button on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

To lock a door from the inside, movethe manual lever on the doorforward. To unlock a door from theinside, move the lever on the doorrearward.

You will see a colored area on thelever when the door is unlocked.



Power Door Locks

Vehicles with power door locks, theswitches are located on the frontdoor armrests.

Press L to lock the doors.

Press U to unlock the doors.

Automatic Door LocksIf the vehicle has power door locksand the remote keyless entrysystem, it has an automatic lock/unlock feature.

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, it is programmed fromthe factory to lock all doorsautomatically when the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park). All the doorswill unlock when the shift lever ismoved back into P (Park).

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, it is programmed fromthe factory to lock all the doorswhen the vehicle speed is greaterthan 24 km/h (15 mph). The doorswill unlock when the key is removedfrom the ignition.

To change the automatic door lockand unlock settings, see “AutomaticDoor Locks” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑20.

Lockout ProtectionIf the vehicle has power door locks,this feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a dooris open.

If the power door lock switch ispressed when a door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the driverdoor will unlock.

Safety Locks (Crew Cab)If the vehicle is a crew cab model, itmay have rear door safety locks.With this feature, the rear doors arelocked so they cannot be openedfrom the inside.



The rear door safety lock is locatedon the inside edge of each rear doorbelow the safety lock label.

To engage the safety locks:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Using the ignition key, turn thesafety lock to the horizontalposition.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the otherrear door.

To open a rear door when the safetylock is on, unlock the door and openthe door from the outside.

To disengage the safety locks:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Using the ignition key, turn thesafety lock to the verticalposition.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the otherrear door.

Doors

Rear Doors

To open the door, open the frontdoor. Then, use the handle to openthe rear door. The rear door must beclosed before closing the front door.



Tailgate

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to rideon the tailgate, even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.People riding on the tailgatecan easily lose their balanceand fall in response to vehiclemaneuvers. Falling from a movingvehicle may result in seriousinjuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate. Besure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a safety beltproperly.

Open the tailgate by pulling up onthe outside handle while pulling thetailgate down.

When the tailgate is shut, be sure itis latched securely.

On vehicles with a locking tailgate,use the ignition key. Turn the keycounterclockwise to lock thetailgate. Turn the key clockwise tounlock the tailgate.

Tailgate Removal

To remove the tailgate:

1. With the tailgate fully open, liftup slightly on the entire tailgateassembly.

2. Remove the retaining cablesfrom both sides of the tailgate bypulling the clips away from thebolt heads while pushing thecable bracket forward.

When the larger part of the holeon the bracket is over the bolt,slide the bracket off of the bolt.



3. With the tailgate partially down,lift up on the passenger side andpull the tailgate toward you, thenmove the tailgate to the right torelease the driver side. You canthen remove the entire tailgateassembly.

Reverse the procedure to reinstallthe tailgate. Make sure it is secure.

To partially lower the tailgate:

1. With the tailgate fully open, liftup slightly on the entire tailgateassembly.

Tailgate Partially Down

2. Remove the retaining cable fromthe passenger side of thetailgate by pulling the clip awayfrom the bolt head while pushingthe cable bracket forward.

When the larger part of the holeon the bracket is over the bolt,slide the bracket off the bolt.

3. Slide the lower end fitting ontothe top bolt. The tailgate will nowstay in the partially openedposition.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for thedriver side.

If you would like to close thetailgate, the bracket cannot be in thepartially opened position. Use thetop position on the bracket toanchor it on the bottom bolt.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm System

If your vehicle has the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) system, thevehicle has a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

To activate the contenttheft-deterrent system:

1. Close all the doors.

2. Lock the doors with the RKEtransmitter. The security light,located on the instrument panelcluster, will flash.

If the LOCK button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, but a door isopen, the horn will chirp six times.Press the LOCK button again, withinthree seconds, and the doors willlock. Close the open door and thesystem will be activated.

If a locked door is not opened usingthe RKE transmitter, or by OnStar®,the pre-alarm will go off. If theengine is not started or UNLOCKnot pressed within 10 seconds, thefront turn signal lamps will flash fortwo minutes, and the horn will soundfor two minutes, then will turn off tosave the battery power.

Remember, the theft-deterrentsystem will not activate if you lockthe doors with a key, the manualdoor lock, or power door lockswitch. The system can only beactivated using the RKE transmitter,or by OnStar®. See the OnStarOwner's Guide for additionalinformation. You should also

remember that you can start yourvehicle with the correct ignition keyif the alarm has been set off.

Here is how to avoid setting off thealarm by accident:. If you do not want to activate the

theft-deterrent system, thevehicle should be locked withthe door key after the doors areclosed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter. Unlocking adoor any other way will set offthe alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident,you can turn off the alarm bypressing UNLOCK on the RKEtransmitter. The alarm will not stop ifyou try to unlock a door anyother way.



Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, activatethe system by locking the doorswith the RKE transmitter.

2. Unlock the door with the manualdoor lock and open the door.This should set off the alarm.

3. To turn the alarm off, press theUNLOCK button on the RKEtransmitter or start the engine.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould but the lights flash, check tosee if the horn works. The horn fusemay be blown. To replace the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑40.

If the alarm does not sound or thefront turn signal lamps do not flash,see your dealer for service.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑22 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer Operation(PASS-Key III+Canada Only)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on if thereis a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The key uses a transponder thatmatches an immobilizer control unitin the vehicle. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. If the key is everdamaged, the vehicle may not start.

When trying to start the vehicle,if the engine does not start and thesecurity light comes on, there maybe a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. Check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑40. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new key made.



It is possible for the theft-deterrentsystem decoder to learn thetransponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys canbe programmed for the vehicle. Thefollowing procedure is forprogramming additional keys only.

Canadian Owners: If the keys arelost or damaged, only a dealer canservice the theft-deterrent system tohave new ones made. Two currentdriver's keys are required toprogram additional keys.

To program a new key:

1. Verify that the new key hasPK3+ stamped on it.

2. Insert the current driver's key inthe ignition and start the engine.If the engine does not start seeyour dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the second current driver'skey in the ignition and start theengine within ten seconds ofremoving the previous key. If theengine does not start see yourdealer for service.

5. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key. Insert the key tobe programmed and turn it toON/RUN within ten seconds ofremoving the previous key.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the security light comes on andstays on while driving, the enginewill restart if you turn it off. However,the theft-deterrent system is notworking properly and must beserviced by your dealer. Thevehicle is not protected by thetheft-deterrent system at this time.

In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.



Immobilizer Operation(Passlock U.S. Only)Passlock® is a passivetheft-deterrent system that enablesfuel if the vehicle is started with avalid key. If an incorrect key is usedor the ignition lock cylinder istampered with, the fuel system isdisabled and the vehicle does notstart.

The security light turns offapproximately five seconds afterthe engine is started. See SecurityLight on page 5‑19.

If the engine stalls and the securitylight flashes, wait about 10 minutesuntil the light stops flashing beforetrying to restart the engine. Releasethe key from START as soon as theengine starts.

If the engine does not start afterthree tries, the vehicle needsservice.

If the engine is running and thesecurity light comes on, the enginerestarts if you turn the engine off.However, the Passlock® system isnot working properly and must beserviced by your dealer. The vehicleis not protected by Passlock® at thistime. See your dealer for service.

In an emergency, call the RoadsideAssistance Center. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Manual MirrorsAdjust the mirrors by pressing themirror up and down and left andright so you can see a clear viewbehind you.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirrors toward thevehicle. Push outward, to return themirrors to their original position.

Power Mirrors

Vehicles with outside power mirrorshave controls on the driver doorarmrest.

To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch to theL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four buttonslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror to the desireddirection.

3. Return the selector switch to thecenter position once the mirrorsare adjusted.

If the mirror begins making aratcheting sound, the mirror hasreached the end of its travel andcan go no farther in that direction.To stop the sound, reverse themirror direction using thecontrol pad.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push outward, to return themirror to its original position.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust this mirror for a clear view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Holdthe mirror in the center to move itup, down, or side-to-side. To reduceheadlamp glare, push the tabforward for daytime use and pull itfor nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information on thesystem and how to subscribe toOnStar. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information aboutthe services OnStar provides.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare of lights from behind thevehicle.

The mirror may also have OnStar®

and/or a compass and outsidetemperature display.

Control buttons for the OnStarsystem are at the bottom of themirror. See the OnStar OwnersGuide for more information aboutthe services OnStar provides. SeeCompass on page 5‑3 for moreinformation about the compassdisplay. See “Temperature Display”after, for more information about theoutside temperature display.

AUTO/ ( / O (On/Off): Press

and hold AUTO/ ( for aboutthree seconds or depending on themirror, press O to turn automaticdimming on or off. The automaticdimming feature comes on and theindicator light illuminates each timethe vehicle is started.

Temperature Display

Y b / O (On/Off): Press Y b ordepending on the mirror, press O toturn the display on or off.

To adjust between Fahrenheit andCelsius:

1. Press and hold Y b / O for afew seconds. The current unit ofmeasure (C or F) flashes.

2. Press Y b / O again andrelease to change the unit ofmeasure. Wait several secondsand the compass/temperaturedisplay returns with the selectedunit of measure.



It is normal under certain conditionsfor the temperature update to bedelayed. If an incorrect temperaturedisplays for an extended period, seeyour dealer.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when a window ispartially open. To reduce the sound,open another window or the sunroof(if equipped).



Manual Windows

On vehicles with manual windows,use the window crank to open andclose each window.

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

Regular Cab Shown, Crew CabSimilar

Push the switch down to open thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to close it.

The switches work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP). See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑31.



Express-Down Window

Windows with an express-downfeature allow the window to belowered fully without pressing andholding the switch. Press the front ofthe switch to the first position, andthe window opens a small amount.Press the switch down fully and thewindow goes all the way down.

To stop the window while it islowering, pull up the front of theswitch.

Window Lockout (Crew Cab)

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

Presso to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. The redline (A) will not be visible whenactivated.

Presso again to deactivate thelockout switch. The red line (A) isvisible when deactivated.



Rear Windows

Sliding Rear Window

If the vehicle has this feature,squeeze the latch in the center ofthe window and slide the glass toopen it.

Be sure the latch is engaged whenthe window is closed.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsRear Seats (Extended Cab) . . . 3-8Rear Seats (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . 3-9

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-22When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-33

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-34Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-39Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-41Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-54

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsOn some crew cab models, thevehicle's front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the restraintdown. Try to move the headrestraint after the button is releasedto make sure that it is locked inplace.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.



Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front edgeof the seat cushion to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust the seat, if available:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.



To adjust the seatback, see “PowerReclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑4.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

If available, the manual lumbar knobis on the outboard side of thedriver seat.

Turn the knob to increase ordecrease lumbar support.

Power Lumbar

If available, press and hold the frontor rear of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support. Releasethe control when the seatbackreaches the desired level of lumbarsupport.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The safety belt cannot properlyrestrain you, and you could beinjured or killed.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.



Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.



To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a power seatback,if available:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Seatback LatchesThe vehicle may have frontseatbacks that fold forward for easyaccess to the rear seats or thestorage area behind the seats.

To fold the seatback forward, pushthe lever on the side of the seatrearward and pull the seatbackforward.



{ WARNING


To return the seatback to the uprightposition, push the seatback all theway back until it latches.

If the seatback was reclined beforebeing folded forward, it will return tothe reclined position.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

If available, the switches are on theoutboard sides of the front seats. Tooperate, the ignition must be on.



This feature will heat the cushionand back of the seats.. Press the top of the switch for

the high setting.. Press the bottom of the switch

for the low setting.. Put the switch in the center

position to turn this feature off.

The heated seat will turn on at thelast setting if the ignition is turnedoff and then back on.

The passenger safety belt must befastened for the heated seat featureto work on the passenger seat.

Rear Seats

Rear Seats(Extended Cab)

On extended cab models, there maybe forward folding seats in therear area.

To fold a rear seat cushion from thestored position to the sittingposition, pull the front of the seatcushion down completely.

The rear seat storage compartmentsmust be closed before folding theseat down. See Rear Storage onpage 4‑2.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

A. Hook and Loop Fastener



To store the seat:

1. Secure the safety belt buckle tothe inboard side of the seat withthe hook and loop fastener (A),so that it does not move whennot in use.

2. Push the entire seat up until it isflush with the trim panel.

Rear Seats (Crew Cab)On crew cab models, the rearseatbacks can be folded forward.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold a rear seatback:

1. Disconnect the rear centersafety belt latch from themini-buckle by inserting the tip ofthe safety belt tongue into theslot on the buckle. Let the beltretract.

2. Pull the loop on the outboardside of the seatback forwarduntil you hear a click.

3. Fold the seatback forward.



To return a seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward.

{ WARNING


2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center safety beltlatch plate to the mini-buckle.Make sure the safety belt is nottwisted.

4. Push and pull on the latch plateto be sure it is secure.

When the seatback is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑9 for additional information.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!



When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑35 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑37.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.



There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe center front passenger position,if equipped, which has a lap belt.See Lap Belt on page 3‑18 for moreinformation.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.



2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If you ever pull the shoulderportion of a passenger belt outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, just let the beltgo back all the way and startagain.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system,if equipped. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑27for more information.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑19.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thebelt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both the beltand the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingposition.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑12.

To move it up or down, squeeze therelease buttons (A) together andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout squeezing the releasebuttons to make sure it has lockedinto position.



Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3‑20.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides for the rearoutside positions. If not, they areavailable through your dealer.

Rear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the shoulder belt:

1. Slide the guide off of its storageclip located between the interiorbody and the seatback.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide back on its storage cliplocated between the interior bodyand the seatback.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Lap BeltThis section is only for the lap belt.To learn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑13.

The vehicle may have a centerseating position. When you sit in thecenter front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has noretractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position, and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.



To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 3‑19.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt system

from doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑9 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑19.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑10.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.

Your vehicle may also have thefollowing airbags:. A roof-rail airbag for the driver

and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.



With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In some

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

crashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑24.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withroof-rail airbags.



{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑35 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑37.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑10 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver's airbag is in the middleof the steering wheel.



The right front passenger's airbag isin the instrument panel on thepassenger's side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If your vehicle has roof-rail airbagsfor the driver, right front passenger,and second row outboardpassengers, they are in the ceilingabove the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle has seat positionsensors which enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver's seat and the right frontpassenger's seat. Seat positionsensors provide information that isused to determine if the airbagsshould deploy at a reduced level orat full deployment.

In addition, your vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.



Your vehicle may or may not haveroof-rail airbags. See Airbag Systemon page 3‑20. Roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes. Roof-railairbags will inflate if the crashseverity is above the system'sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.Both roof-rail airbags will deploywhen either side of the vehicle isstruck.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forroof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat‐mounted side impact airbags,there are airbags modules in theside of the front seatbacks closestto the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually. Roof-railairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑24 for more information.



Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize theairbags inflated. Roof-rail airbagsmay still be at least partially inflatedfor some time after they deploy.Some components of the airbagmodule may be hot for severalminutes. For location of the airbagmodules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑25.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors(if equipped with power door locks),turn the interior lamps on, flash thehazard warning flashers, turn off theradio, and shut off the fuel systemafter the airbag inflates. You canlock the doors again by using the

door lock. The interior lamps andhazard warning flashers willdeactivate after approximately15 minutes.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.



Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. Your vehicle has a crashsensing and diagnostic modulewhich records information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑20 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑20.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag system.Improper service can mean thatthe airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemIf the vehicle has one of thepassenger airbag status indicatorspictured in the following illustrations,then the vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator, if equipped,is visible on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefer to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol foron or off will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑11.



The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag is notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;

an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

We recommend that rear‐facingchild restraints not be transported inthe vehicle, even if the airbag is off.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



If your vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right front passengerseat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passenger'sfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in your vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly— whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑10 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) onpage 3‑59 or Securing ChildRestraints (Center Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑57 orSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑54.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with yourdealer.

If no rear seat is available, donot install a child restraint in thisvehicle and check with yourdealer.



If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult‐Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow the

system to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the belt ispulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag off forsome adult size occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back all theway and start again.



A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how wellthe passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑33 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑18.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle may havea passenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensing

system may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑27.

If you have any questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer

Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑4 orCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑4.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑1 orCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑4.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.



Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑10 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑22. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑10 for more information.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑13 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑13.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.



{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help achild to see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑43 formore information.



Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.



Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even thoughit is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑27 for additionalinformation.

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

If the vehicle does not have rearseats, rear-facing child restraintsshould not be installed in thevehicle, even if the passengerairbag is off.



If a child in a forward-facing childrestraint must be transported in avehicle that does not have rearseats, the child restraint should besecured in the right front seatposition. See “Securing ChildRestraints (Right Front SeatPosition)” later in this section, forinstructions on how to install a childrestraint in the right front seatposition.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerable in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever you install a childrestraint, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle, even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.



In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.



Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Crew Cab — Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

For crew cab models, there areexposed metal lower anchors foreach rear outboard seating position,where the seatback meets the backof the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, place your hand in apalm-up position and reach upbetween the seat cushion and theseatback.

Extended Cab — Rear Seat


j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

For extended cab models with rearseats, there are exposed metallower anchors for each rear seatingposition, attached to the back wall,near the seat cushion.



To assist in locating the loweranchors, place your hand in apalm-up position and reach upbetween the seat cushion and theseatback.

Front Bucket Seats — Regularand Extended Cab without Rear

Seats


Front Bench Seat — Regularand Extended Cab without Rear

Seats


Some top tether anchors havecovers. To assist in locating thecovered top tether anchors, the toptether anchor symbol is on thecover.

CrewCab

The top tether anchors in a crewcab model are on the back wallbehind each rear seating position.



Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.


The top tether anchors in anextended cab model are on thecenter of the back wall behind aremovable cover for the rear seatingpositions. Be sure to use an anchornearest to the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Regular and Extended Cabwithout Rear Seats (Front Bucket

Seats)

For regular and extended cabmodels without rear seats that havefront bucket seats, there is a toptether anchor behind a removablecover on the back wall behind theright front passenger seat. You mayhave to pull the seatback forward toaccess the anchor.

Regular and Extended Cabwithout Rear Seats (Front

Bench Seat)

For regular and extended cabmodels without rear seats that havea front bench seat, there are toptether anchors behind removablecovers on the back wall behind theright front passenger seat and thecenter front passenger seat. Theseatback may have to be pulledforward to access the anchors.



Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑41 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

Crew Cab — Rear Seat

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsrecommend that the top tetherbe attached, attach the toptether to the top tetheranchor (A). Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Pull the seatback forward toaccess the top tetheranchors (A). See Rear

Seats (Crew Cab) onpage 3‑8 or Rear Seats(Extended Cab) onpage 3‑8.

2.2. Route the top tetheraccording to your childrestraint instructions andthe following instructions:

If the child restraint has asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.



If the child restraint has adual tether, route the tetherover the seatback.

2.3. Attach the top tether to theanchor (A). Make sure thatyou secure the top tether tothe top tether anchor andnot to the seatbacklatch (B).

2.4. Push rearward on theseatback until it locks intoits upright position. Pushand pull on the seatback tomake sure it is securedproperly.

3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

3.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

3.2. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

4. Tighten the top tether.

5. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.




1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors (D)for the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors (D) in the vehicle.The child restraintinstructions will showyou how.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor (C). Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Pull on the finger accesstab to remove the cover toaccess the top tetheranchors (C).



2.2. Route the top tether (A)through the loop (B) at thetop of the seatback toattach the top tether to thenearest top tetheranchor (C).

3. Tighten the lower anchorattachments and the top tether.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.


Right Front Seat — Regular/Extended Cab without RearSeats

The vehicle has a right frontpassenger airbag and may alsohave a passenger sensing system.If the vehicle has a passengersensing system it is designed to turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag when an infant in arear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected.See “Securing Child Restraints(Right Front Seat Position)” later inthis section and Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑27 for importantsafety information and additionalinformation on installing a childrestraint in the right front seatposition.

1. See “Securing Child Restraints(Right Front Seat Position)” laterin this section for instructions oninstalling the child restraint usingthe safety belts.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsrecommend that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Pull the seatback forward toaccess the top tetheranchor. See SeatbackLatches on page 3‑6.

2.2. Pull on the finger accesstab to remove the cover toaccess the top tetheranchor.



2.3. Route the top tetheraccording to your childrestraint instructions andthe following instructions:

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed or adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

3. Attach and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions.




Center Front Seat — Regular/Extended Cab without RearSeats

For vehicles without rear seats,manufacturers are required toprovide top tether anchors for allnon-driver seating positions andinstructions for using those anchors.Even if a top tether anchor isavailable, you should not install achild restraint in the center frontseat position. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑41 for importantsafety information and additionalinformation on installing a childrestraint in the center front seatposition. See “Securing ChildRestraints (Center Front SeatPosition)” later in this section forinstructions on installing the childrestraint using the safety belts andtop tether anchor.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If your child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑43 for how toinstall your child restraint usingLATCH. If you secure a childrestraint using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑43 fortop tether anchor locations.



Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If your child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If you need to install more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, besure to read Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑41.


2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. If your child restraint has a toptether, attach the top tether tothe top tether anchor. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑43.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 6.

7. Tighten the top tether. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑43.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle’s safety beltand let it go back all the way. If thetop tether is attached to a top tetheranchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition)For vehicles without rear seats,manufacturers are required toprovide top tether anchors for allnon-driver seating positions andinstructions for using those anchors.Even if a top tether anchor isavailable, you should not install achild restraint in the center frontseating position.

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

In addition, some larger childrestraints, if installed in the centerfront seating position, may interferewith access to the driver and rightfront passenger safety belt buckles.See Safety Belts on page 3‑11 forinformation, including warnings,about the importance of safetybelt use.

If the vehicle does not have rearseats, rear-facing child restraintsshould not be installed in thevehicle, even if the passengerairbag is off.

If a child in a forward-facing childrestraint must be transported in avehicle that does not have rearseats, the child restraint should besecured in the right front seatposition. See “Securing ChildRestraints (Right Front SeatPosition)” later in this section, forinstructions on how to install a childrestraint in the right front seatposition.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward‐facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



The lap belt would be used tosecure a child restraint in thisposition, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Adjust the driver seat to thedesired position. Fold thearmrest up, if equipped.

2. Move the passenger seat so thatthe seat and seatback arealigned with the driver seat andseatback positions. See SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3 orPower Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3 and RecliningSeatbacks on page 3‑4 for moreinformation.

3. Make the center position lap beltas long as possible by tilting thelatch plate and pulling it alongthe belt.

4. Place the child restraint onthe seat.

5. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tetheranchor, attach the top tether onthe child restraint to the toptether anchor on the vehicle.Route the top tether according tothe child restraint instructionsand the following instructions:

5.1. Pull on the finger accesstab to remove the cover toaccess the top tetheranchor.

5.2. Route the top tether overthe center seatback orfolding armrest, if equipped.

5.3. Attach the top tether to theslots in the back panel asshown.

Do not tighten the top tetherat this time.

6. Pick up the latch plate on thecenter position lap safety belt,and run the lap safety beltthrough the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



7. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. Position therelease button on the buckle sothat the safety belt can beunbuckled.

8. Tighten the center position lapbelt by pulling on the loose endof the belt. It may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tightenthe belt.

9. Tighten the top tether. Follow thechild restraint manufacturer'sinstructions.

10. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt.If the top tether is attached to thetop tether anchor, disconnect it andreinstall the top tether anchor cover.

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑41.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger's frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑27 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑11 for more informationon this, including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even thoughit is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑27 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, a childrestraint should not be installed inyour vehicle, even if the airbagis off.

If your child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑43 for how andwhere to install your child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑43 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restraintmanufacturer recommends usinga top tether anchor, attach thetop tether to the top tetheranchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑43.



7. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 7.

8. Tighten the top tether. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑43.

9. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the vehicle is equipped with thepassenger sensing system, andwhen the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator on the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑11.

If a child restraint has been installedand on indicator is lit, see “If the OnIndicator is Lit for a Child Restraint”under Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑27 for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

CupholdersThis vehicle may havetwo cupholders located on the lowerpart of the front doors as well astwo cupholders located at the frontend of the console. Vehicles withbench seats may have cupholdersattached to the front of thecenter seat.

For vehicles that are an extendedcab or crew cab model, the vehiclealso has two rear cupholders. Oncrew cab models, the cupholdersare located at the front end of therear center seat cushion. Thecupholder can be removed forcleaning by pressing the tab belowthe cupholder and sliding thecupholder forward.

On extended cab models, the rearseat cupholders are located on topof the rear center console.

Vehicles with ashtrays will use oneof the cupholders.


4-2 Storage

Rear StorageExtended cab models might havestorage compartments under therear seats.

To access the storagecompartments, lift the cushion onthe bottom of the rear seats. Thisexposes the storage boxes underthe seat.

To open a storage box, unhook thebottom and lift the latches on eachside of the storage box.

Lift the lid from the center area toaccess the storage box.

Center Console StorageFor vehicles with bench seats, theremay be a center armrest storagearea. Lift up on the upper tablocated at the front of the armrest torelease the latch to open.

For vehicles with bucket seats oruplevel packages, the vehicle mayhave a two-tiered center armreststorage area. Lift up on the upper orlower tab at the front of the armrestto open the upper or lowerstorage area.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-2Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . 5-6Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-9Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-10Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-12MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-17Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-17

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-19Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-23Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-24Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-24Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-25Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-25Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-26Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-27


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The steering wheel adjustment leveris located on the left side of thesteering wheel.

To adjust:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

HornTo sound the horn, press the hornsymbol on the steering wheel pad.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper controls arelocated on the turn signal/lanechange lever. They are controlled byturning the band with thiszsymbol.

The windshield wipers work in allignition positions, except LOCK/OFF. This includes the RetainedAccess Power mode. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑31.



Move the band to one of thefollowing positions:

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, movethe band to8 and then release it.For several wipes, hold the band on8 longer.

N (Adjustable Interval Wipes):For adjustable interval wipes, turnthe band up for more frequent wipesor down for less frequent wipes.

6 (Low Speed): For slowwipes, turn the band to the first solidposition past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For fast wipes,turn the band to the second solidposition past the delay settings.

9 (Off): Use to turn the wipers off.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced.

Windshield Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

QL (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle on top of the multifunctionlever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers will clear thewindow and then either stop orreturn to your preset speed.

Compass

Compass Operation

Press Y b or depending on the

mirror, press O once to turn thedisplay on or off.

Compass Calibration

The compass may needcalibration if:. CAL is displayed while driving in

the vehicle.. After approximately five seconds,

the display does not show acompass heading, N for North,for example, there may be astrong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Interferencecan be caused by a magneticantenna mount, magnetic notepad holder, or a similarmagnetic item.

. The compass does not displaythe correct heading and thecompass zone variance is setcorrectly.

To calibrate, CAL must be displayedin the mirror compass windows.If CAL is not displayed, press andhold Y b / O for several seconds oruntil CAL is displayed.



The compass can be calibrated bydriving the vehicle in circles at8 km/h (5 mph) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

Compass Variance

The mirror is set to zone eight.If you do not live in zone eight ordrive out of the area, the compassvariance needs to be changed tothe appropriate zone.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find the current location andvariance zone number on thefollowing zone map.

2. Press and hold Y b / O until Zand/or a zone number displays.

3. Press Y b / O repeatedly untilthe new zone number displays.After you stop pressing thebutton, the display shows acompass direction within afew seconds.

Clock

AM-FM Radio

Press and hold HR until the correcthour displays. Press and hold MNuntil the correct minute displays.There is an initial two-second delaybefore the clock goes into time-setmode. To display the time with theignition off, press RCL, HR, or MN.


Press and hold the HR button untilthe correct hour displays. Press andhold the MN button until the correctminute displays. The time can beset with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with anFM station broadcasting Radio DataSystem (RDS) information, pressand hold the HR and MN buttons atthe same time until RDS TIMEdisplays. To accept this time, pressand hold the HR and MN buttons, atthe same time, for anothertwo seconds. If the time is notavailable from the station, NOUPDAT (update) displays.



RDS time is broadcast once aminute. After tuning to an RDSbroadcast station, it could take afew minutes for the time to update.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle may have an accessorypower outlet located below theclimate control system and on therear of the center console. Removethe cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle and adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑67.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterTo use the lighter, press it in all theway, and let go. When it is ready, itwill pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysThe vehicle may have a removableashtray and cigarette lighter.

The ashtray is located in the centerconsole area. The ashtray can beremoved for cleaning. When theashtray is removed, this area canalso be used as a cupholder.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains what

to do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust thevehicle's chime level. To change thevolume level of the chime, pressand hold pushbutton 6 with theignition on and the radio power off.The volume level will change fromthe normal level to loud, and LOUDwill appear on the radio display. Tochange back to the default ornormal setting, press and holdpushbutton 6 again. The volumelevel will change from the loud levelto normal, and NORMAL will appearon the radio display. Each time thechime volume is changed, threechimes will sound to indicate thenew volume selected. Removing theradio and not replacing it with afactory radio or chime module willdisable vehicle chimes.



Instrument Cluster

English Automatic Transmission 2.9L Shown, Metric, Manual Transmission, 3.7L and 5.3L Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eithermiles (used in the United States) orkilometers (used in Canada).

The odometer mileage can bechecked without the vehicle runningby pressing the trip informationstem. See “Odometer” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑20 for more information.

If the cluster is replaced the newone will automatically detect andupdate the vehicle's accumulatedmileage.

Trip OdometerThe vehicle has a trip odometer thatindicates how far the vehicle hasbeen driven since the trip odometerwas last set to zero.

See “Trip Odometer” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑20 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel thevehicle has remaining in thefuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.



Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseindicate a problem with the vehicle'sfuel gauge:. At the gas station, the gas pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

When the fuel in the fuel tank is low,a LOW FUEL message will displayon the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑25 for moreinformation.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the gauge pointer is near the topof the gauge, the engine is too hot.It means that the engine coolant hasoverheated. If the vehicle has beenoperating under normal drivingconditions, pull the vehicle off theroad, stop the vehicle and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑23 for more information.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

When the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds toremind a driver to fasten the safetybelt, unless the driver safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light comes on andstays on for several seconds, thenflashes for several more.



This chime and light are repeated ifthe driver remains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion. If the driversafety belt is already buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminder light,several seconds after the engine isstarted, a chime sounds forseveral seconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safetybelt. The passenger safety belt light,located on the instrument panel,comes on and stays on forseveral seconds and then flashesfor several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe passenger remains unbuckledand the vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stays on itindicates there is an electricalproblem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3‑20.

The airbag readiness light flashesfor a few seconds when the engineis started. If the light does not comeon then, have it fixed immediately.



{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, an airbag Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message can alsocome on. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑23 for more information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorIf the vehicle has one of thepassenger airbag status indicatorspictured in the following illustrations,then the vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator is on theinstrument panel. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑27 forimportant safety information.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefer to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.



If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑10 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑23 for moreinformation. This light could indicatethat there are problems with agenerator drive belt, or that there isan electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.



MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑26 for more information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by the

vehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑4.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.



If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑55. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑53.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment. For theinspection, the emission system testequipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.



The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.

If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

English Metric

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.If it does not, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑45 formore information. The light stays onif the parking brake does notrelease fully. If it stays on after theparking brake is fully released, itmeans there is a brake problem.



If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop. The brakepedal might be harder to push, or itmight go closer to the floor. It cantake longer to stop. If the light is stillon, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑91.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady. Thenstart the engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, the vehicle still has brakes, butnot antilock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is alsoon, the vehicle does not haveantilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑15.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑20 for all brake relatedDIC messages.



StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the TCS is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystems and the warning lightturns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑47 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑48 for moreinformation.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warning lightcomes on briefly while starting theengine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

The light flashes while theStabiliTrak system and TCS areworking to assist the driver withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions.

If the StabiliTrak system and TCSlight comes on and stays on whiledriving and a TRACTION FAULT orSERVICE STAB SYS messagedisplays on the DIC, the vehicleneeds service.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑48, Traction Control System(TCS) on page 9‑47 and RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑26 for more information.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑23 for more information.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑54 for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑57 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.



Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.

Security Light

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑10.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑50 for moreinformation.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information such as the tripodometer, personalization features,and warning messages. The DICdisplay is located on the instrumentpanel cluster.

Operation and Displays

The Driver Information Center (DIC)comes on when the ignition is on.

If a problem is detected, a warningmessage appears on the display.Pressing and releasing the tripodometer reset stem on the DICacknowledges some currentwarnings or service messages.Some messages only clear after therequired action has been taken.

The DIC has different menu itemswhich can be accessed by pressingthe trip odometer reset stem on theDIC. This includes trip information,

such as the odometer and tripodometer, engine oil life reset, andpersonalization features that areexplained in the followinginformation. The DIC trip odometerreset stem is located on theinstrument panel cluster next to theDIC display.

Trip Information

Odometer

The odometer is automaticallydisplayed on the DIC when you startthe vehicle. The odometer showsthe total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles for theUnited States or kilometers forCanada.

Trip Odometer

Press and release the reset stemuntil TRIP appears on the DICdisplay. The trip odometer showsthe current distance traveled sincethe last reset of the trip odometer ineither miles for the United States orkilometers for Canada.

To reset the trip odometer, pressand hold the reset stem until thedisplay returns to zero.

Engine Oil Life System

With the engine off, turn the key toON/RUN and then press the resetstem until OIL LIFE RESETappears — alternating between OILLIFE and RESET — on the DICdisplay. The CHANGE OIL messagealerts you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions. Always reset theOIL LIFE message after an oilchange. To reset the message, seeEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑10 andMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.



Personalization Features

Language

This feature allows you to choosethe language in which the DICdisplay shows information.

To set your choice for this feature:

1. With the engine off, turn the keyto ON/RUN, but do not start theengine.

2. Close all doors so the DOORSmessage does not display inthe DIC.

3. Momentarily press and releasethe reset stem until the currentlanguage is displayed: English(default), Spanish, or French.

4. To select a different language,press and hold the reset stemuntil the next language appears.

5. Repeat Step 4 until the desiredlanguage is displayed. Once thedesired language is shown onthe DIC display, the languageis set.

6. To exit the language selection,momentarily press and releasethe reset stem. All DICmessages will now displayin the language selected.

Automatic Door Locks

This feature allows you to programthe door locks to a preferred setting.


1. With the engine off, turn the keyto LOCK/OFF. Do not removethe key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the power doorlock button until the DIC displayshows the current doorlock mode.

3. To view the next available mode,press and hold the reset stemuntil the mode appears. Releasethe reset stem and press andhold again to view thenext mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shownon the DIC display, briefly pressthe reset stem to set yourchoice. The DIC display thenclears.

The following are the availablemodes:

Lock 1 (default): On vehicles withan automatic transmission, thismode locks all of the doors whenthe vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)and unlocks all of the doors whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, this mode locks all ofthe doors when the vehicle speed isgreater than 24 km/h (15 mph) andunlocks all of the doors when thekey is removed from the ignition.



Lock 2: On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, this modelocks all of the doors when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park) andunlocks the driver's door when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, this mode locks all ofthe doors when the vehicle speed isgreater than 24 km/h (15 mph) andunlocks the driver's door when thekey is removed from the ignition.

Lock 3: On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, this modelocks all of the doors when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).The doors will not automaticallyunlock.

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, this mode locks all ofthe doors when the vehicle speed isgreater than 24 km/h (15 mph). Thedoors will not automatically unlock.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)Feedback

This feature allows you to programthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)feedback to a preferred setting.


1. With the engine off, turn the keyto LOCK/OFF. Do not removethe key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the RKEtransmitter at the same time.Hold both buttons until the DICdisplay shows the current RKEfeedback mode.

3. To view the next available mode,press and hold the reset stemuntil the mode appears. Releasethe reset stem and press andhold again to view thenext mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shownon the DIC display, briefly pressthe reset stem to set yourchoice. The DIC display thenclears.

The following are the availablemodes:

RFA 1 (default): This mode flashesthe parking lamps when you pressthe lock or unlock buttons on theRKE transmitter.

RFA 2: This mode flashes theparking lamps and sounds the hornwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter. This mode alsoflashes the parking lamps when youpress the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

RFA 3: This mode flashes theparking lamps and sounds the hornwhen you press the lock or unlockbuttons on the RKE transmitter.

RFA 4: This mode disables RKEfeedback. There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock or unlockbuttons on the RKE transmitter.



Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another. The messages aredisplayed for several seconds each.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you shouldpress and release the trip odometerreset stem to acknowledge that youreceived the messages and to clearthem from the display. Eachmessage must be acknowledgedindividually.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember thatclearing the messages only makesthe messages disappear, not correctthe problem.

The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

SERVICE CHARG (Charge)SYS (System)

This message displays if there is aproblem with the battery chargingsystem. Under certain conditions,the battery warning light may alsoturn on in the instrument panelcluster. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑12. The battery will notbe charging at an optimal rate andthe vehicle will lose the ability toenter the fuel economy mode. Thevehicle is safe to drive, howeverhave the electrical system checkedby your dealer. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.

Brake System Messages

ABS (Antilock Brake System)FAULT

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS). Check the ABS assoon as possible and have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeBraking on page 9‑4 and AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑16 for more information.Press and release the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

BRAKES

This message displays if there is aproblem with the brakes. Check thebrakes as soon as possible andhave your vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Braking on page 9‑4and Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 5‑16 formore information. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.



FLUID

This message displays if the brakefluid is low. Check the brake fluid assoon as possible and have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeBraking on page 9‑4 for moreinformation. Press and release thereset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.

PARK BRK (Brake)

This message displays when theparking brake is set. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑45 and AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑16 for more information.The message clears from thedisplay after the parking brake isreleased or by pressing andreleasing the reset stem.

Door Ajar Messages

DOORS

This message displays when one ormore of the doors is ajar. Check allthe doors on your vehicle to makesure they are closed. The messageclears from the display after all ofthe doors are closed.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

AC (Air Conditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohigh and the air conditioning in yourvehicle needs to be turned off. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑23and Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 for more information. Thismessage displays along with theENG HOT message.

ENG (Engine) HOT

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is hot.Check the engine coolanttemperature gauge. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑9. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer as soonas possible if you suspect theengine is overheating. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑23 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE OIL

This message displays when the oilneeds to be changed. Check the oilin your vehicle as soon as possibleand have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation. Press and release thereset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.



OIL

This message displays when the oilpressure is low. See Engine OilPressure Light on page 5‑18 andEngine Oil on page 10‑10 for moreinformation.

Engine Power Messages

REDUCED POWER

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but thereis no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible. Press and release

the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL CAP

This message displays if thevehicle's fuel cap is either off orloose. Pull over as soon as possibleand check to see if the fuel cap issecure. You may also see the checkengine light on the instrument panelcluster. If the check engine lightdoes come on when the fuel capwas loose, it may take a few drivingtrips before the light turns off. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13 for more information if thelight still remains on. Press andrelease the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

LOW FUEL

This message displays if the level offuel in the vehicle is low. Also checkthe fuel gauge. See Fuel Gauge onpage 5‑8 for more information. Refillthe fuel tank as soon as possible.

Lamp Messages

TURN SIGNAL

This message displays when theturn signal is on for about 1.2 km(0.75 miles) of travel. Press andrelease the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.



Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STAB (Stability) SYS(System)

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑48 for more information.

STAB (Stability) SYS(System) OFF

This message displays when theStabiliTrak system is turned off. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑48for more information.

TRAC (Traction) OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off by pressing theStabiliTrak button. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑48 for moreinformation.

TRAC (Traction) ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned on when it was previously offduring the same ignition cycle.

TRAC (Traction) LOW

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isactive.

TRACTION FAULT

This message will display if there isa problem with the TCS. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑48for more information. Press andrelease the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)

This message displays if yourvehicle needs service. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer assoon as possible.



Tire Messages

LOW TIRE

This message displays if a low tirepressure is detected in any of thevehicle's tires. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay. The message appears ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. See Tires on page 10‑47and Tire Pressure on page 10‑54 formore information on tires and thecorrect inflation pressures.

SERV (Service) TPM (TirePressure Monitor)

This message displays if a part onthe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑18. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑57 formore information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.

Transmission Messages

SERV (Service) 4WD(Four-Wheel Drive)

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transfer casecontrol system. Check the transfercase on your vehicle and have itserviced by your dealer. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 9‑40 formore information about the transfercase. Press and release the resetstem to acknowledge the messageand clear it from the display.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesExit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel on the leftside of the steering wheel.

O (Exterior Lamps): Turn theknob, located to the right of thissymbol, to choose one of the fourexterior lamp positions.

O (Off): Turns off all exterior lampsincluding the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the following:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

See Automatic Headlamp Systemon page 6‑3 for more information.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps, together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.


6-2 Lighting

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the key is out of the ignition.To turn off the chime, turn theheadlamp switch to off and thenback on. In the automatic mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis in LOCK/OFF.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,if the parking lamps are turned onmanually, the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) will stay on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you toturn the high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to returnto low beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They will stay on as long as thelever is held toward you. Thehigh-beam indicator on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.


Lighting 6-3

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will come on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in

P (Park) if you have anautomatic transmission.

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL are on, only theparking lamps or reduced intensitylow beam headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarkers, andother lamps will not be on. Theinstrument panel will not be lit upeither.

When it begins to get dark, theheadlamps will automatically switchfrom DRL to the regular headlamps.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system will turnon after the transmission has beenshifted from P (Park) to D (Drive).The headlamps, taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, roofmarker lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights turn on at normalbrightness. The radio lights willbecome dimmer when theheadlights are off compared to whenthe headlights are on.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel. Do not cover the sensor,or the system will be on wheneverthe ignition is on.

The system can turn on theheadlamps when driving in aparking garage, through a tunnel orwhen there is overcast weather.This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system will only beaffected when the light sensordetects a change in lighting lastinglonger than the delay.


6-4 Lighting

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it will take about 1 minute for theautomatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrumentpanel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure the instrumentpanel brightness control is in the fullbright position. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control onpage 6‑6.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button located on theinstrument panel, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.


Lighting 6-5

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb maybe burned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. For bulb replacement, seeTaillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps on page 10‑37.For a blown fuse or circuit breaker,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑40.

Turn Signal On Chime

If a turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile), a chimewill sound at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL will also appear in the DIC.To turn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

See “TURN SIGNAL” under LampMessages on page 5‑25 for moreinformation.

Fog Lamps

The fog lamp button is located nearthe exterior lamps control.

# (Fog Lamps): For vehicles withfog lamps, press to turn the foglamps on or off. An indicator lightwill turn on in the button when thefog lamps are on.

The parking lamps or low-beamheadlamps must be on for the foglamps to work. The fog lamps will gooff whenever the high-beamheadlamps come on. When the highbeams go off, the fog lamps comeon again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Exterior Cargo LampsThe cargo lamps (if equipped) canbe used if more light is needed inthe cargo area of the vehicle or inthe top-box storage units.

This button is located on the driverside of the instrument panel nearthe exterior lamp control.


6-6 Lighting

Press to turn the cargo lamps onand off.

The dome lamps must be on for thecargo lamps to come on. See DomeLamps on page 6‑6.

If the vehicle is equipped withBluetooth®, turning the instrumentpanel illumination controlthumbwheel all the way up will turnon the cargo lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlD (Instrument Panel Lights):Turn the thumbwheel up or down tobrighten or dim the instrument panellights and the radio display. Theinstrument panel lights, cluster, andradio display do not dim to completedarkness. Turning the thumbwheelall the way up will turn on the domelamps and may also turn on thecargo lamp, if the vehicle isequipped with Bluetooth.

The instrument panel lightbrightness control will only work ifthe headlamps or parking lamps areon. See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened.

To manually turn on the domelamps, turn the thumbwheel, locatednext to the exterior lamps control, allthe way up. The cargo lamps maycome on, if the vehicle is equippedwith Bluetooth. In this position, thelamps remain on whether a door isopened or closed.

Reading Lamps

Press the lens on the lamps to turneach reading lamp on or off.

These lamps will not come on withthe dome lamps.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated below the exterior lampscontrol.

E (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthis button in to make the domelamps remain off when the doorsare open. To return the lamps toautomatic operation, pressE againand return it to the out position.


Lighting 6-7

Lighting Features

Exit LightingThe interior lamps will come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The lamps will not come onif the dome override button ispressed in.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see the

voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all of thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power whenever

needed. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays, itis recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑20.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamp if it is left on for more than20 minutes when the ignition is inLOCK/OFF. This helps to preventthe battery from running down.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-14Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-14

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Introduction

InfotainmentDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.


7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signals relatedto safety belts, parking brake, andother functions of the vehicleoperate through the radio/entertainment system. If thatequipment is replaced oradditional equipment is added tothe vehicle, the chimes may notwork. Make sure that replacementor additional equipment iscompatible with the vehiclebefore installing it. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑4.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑31 for moreinformation.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the radio. Thefeature works automatically bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If theradio is moved to a different vehicle,it does not operate and either LOCor LOCKED displays.

When the radio and vehicle areturned off, there may be a blinkingred light to indicate TheftLock isarmed.

With TheftLock activated, the radiodoes not operate if stolen.



Operation

AM-FM Radio




Playing the Radio

AM-FM Radio

PWR (Power): Press to turn thesystem on and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn to increase orto decrease the volume.

RCL (Recall): Press to switch thedisplay between the radio stationfrequency, band, and the time.When the ignition is off, press todisplay the time.


PWR (Power): Press to turn thesystem on and off.

q VOL r (Volume): Turn toincrease or to decrease the volume.

DISPL (Display): When the ignitionis turned off, press to displaythe time.

For RDS, press the DISPL knob tochange what displays while usingRDS. The display options arestation name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY (program type),and the name of the program(if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press theDISPL knob while in XM mode toretrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title,Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on thedisplay, press the DISPL knob untilyou see the desired display, thenpress and hold this knob fortwo seconds and the radiobeeps once.



AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume):Automatic volume automaticallyadjusts the audio system to makeup for road and wind noise whiledriving. The volume level shouldalways sound the same whiledriving.

Set the volume at the desired level.Press to select LOW, MEDIUM, andHIGH. AVOL displays. Each highersetting allows for higher volumecompensation at faster vehiclespeeds.

NONE displays if the radio cannotdetermine the vehicle speed. To turnautomatic volume off, press untilOFF displays.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AM-FM Radio

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press and release the AUDIObutton until BAS (bass) or TRE(treble) displays.

2. Press and hold thew orx button to increase or todecrease the tone.

To adjust the bass or treble to thecenter position:

1. Press and release the AUDIObutton until BAS (bass) or TRE(treble) displays.

2. Press and hold the AUDIObutton for more thantwo seconds until a beepsounds.

To adjust both tone controls andboth speaker controls to the middleposition:

1. Exit out of audio mode bypressing another button, causingthe radio to perform that functionor wait five seconds for thedisplay to return to time of day.

2. Press and hold AUDIO for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds. CEN (center) displays.


To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press and release the AUDIOknob until BASS (bass) or TREB(treble) displays.

2. Turn the AUDIO knob toincrease or to decreasethe tone.

To adjust the bass/treble to themiddle position, press and hold theAUDIO knob. The radio producesone beep and adjusts the displaylevel to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speakercontrols to the middle position, pushand hold the AUDIO knob when notone or speaker control displays.ALL CENTERED displays and abeep sounds.



AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press to selectcustomized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz,talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To return to the manual mode, pressthe AUTO EQ button until CUSTOMdisplays. Then manually adjust thebass/treble, using the AUDIO knob.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

Fade may not be available if thevehicle is a regular cab model.

AM-FM Radio

To adjust balance or fade:

1. Press and release the AUDIObutton until BAL (balance) orFAD (fade) displays.

2. Press and hold thew orx button to increase or todecrease the level.

To adjust the balance or fade to thecenter position:

1. Press and release theAUDIO button until BAL(balance) or FAD (fade) displays.

2. Press and hold theAUDIO button for more thantwo seconds until a beepsounds.

To adjust both speaker controls andboth tone controls to the middleposition:

1. Exit out of audio mode bypressing another button, causingthe radio to perform that functionor wait five seconds for thedisplay to return to time of day.

2. Press and hold AUDIO for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds. CEN (center) displays.


To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press and release theAUDIO knob until BAL (balance)or FADE (fade) displays.

2. Turn the AUDIO knob toincrease or to decrease thelevel.

To adjust the balance or fade to themiddle position:

1. Press and release theAUDIO knob until BAL (balance)or FADE (fade) displays.

2. Press and hold the AUDIO knobuntil one beep sounds.

To adjust all tone and speakercontrols to the middle position, pushand hold the AUDIO knob when notone or speaker control displays.ALL CENTERED displays and abeep sounds.



Radio Messages

AM-FM Radio

CAL (Calibration Error): Theaudio system has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If CAL displays it means that theradio has not been configuredproperly for the vehicle and it mustbe returned to your dealer forservice.

LOC (Locked): This messagedisplays when the THEFTLOCK®

system has locked up. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.


CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Theaudio system has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If CAL ERR displays it means thatthe radio has not been configuredproperly for the vehicle and it mustbe returned to your dealer forservice.

LOCKED: This message displayswhen the TheftLock® system haslocked up. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Finding a Station

AM-FM Radio

AM FM: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, or AM.

TUNE: Turn to select radiostations.

o SEEK: Press to go to theprevious station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and holdo SEEK for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Presso SEEK again to stop scanning.



To scan preset stations, press andhold o SEEK for more thanfour seconds until two beeps sound.The radio goes to the first presetstation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next preset station.Press o SEEK again to stopscanning presets.

SEEK p : Press to go to the nextstation and stay there.

To scan stations, press and holdSEEK p for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. PressSEEK p again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press andhold SEEK p for more thanfour seconds until two beeps sound.The radio goes to the first presetstation stored on the pushbuttons,plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next preset station. PressSEEK p again to stop scanningpresets.


BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2(if equipped). The selectiondisplays.

q TUNE r : Turn to select radiostations.

q SEEK r : Press to go to theprevious or next station and staythere.

q SCAN r : Press and hold formore than two seconds, SCANdisplays and the radio beeps once.The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press q or r again, tostop scanning presets.

To scan preset stations, press andhold q or r for more thanfour seconds, PSCN displays andthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a preset station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the nextpreset station. Press q or r again,to stop scanning presets.

Radio Data System (RDS)

The Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) hasan RDS system. RDS features areavailable for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation.

With RDS, the radio can do thefollowing:. Seek to stations broadcasting

the selected type ofprogramming.

. Receive announcementsconcerning local and nationalemergencies.

. Display messages from radiostations.

. Seek to stations with trafficannouncements.



This system relies upon receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works when theinformation is available. In rarecases, a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDSstation, the station name or callletters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can alsoprovide the time of day, a programtype (PTY) for current programming,and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: The Alert feature warns oflocal or national emergencies. Whenan alert announcement comes onthe current radio station, ALERT!displays. The announcement isheard, even if the volume is low or aCD is playing. If a CD is playing,play stops during the

announcement. Alertannouncements cannot beturned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests ofthe emergency broadcast system.This feature is not supported by allRDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the currentstation has a message, theinformation symbol or INFOdisplays. Press this button to seethe message. The message candisplay the artist, song title, call inphone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is notdisplayed, parts of the messagedisplay every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, pressand release the INFO button. A newgroup of words displays after everypress of this button. Once thecomplete message has displayed,the information symbol or INFOdisappears from the display untilanother new message is received.

The last message can be displayedby pressing the INFO button. Thelast message stays on the displayuntil a new message is received orthe radio is tuned to a differentstation.

When a message is not availablefrom a station, NO INFO displays.

TRAF (Traffic): TRAF displayswhen the station tuned tobroadcasts traffic announcements.When a traffic announcement isbroadcast on this station you willhear it.

If the station does not broadcasttraffic announcements, press theTRAF button and the radioseeks to a station that does. Whena station that broadcasts trafficannouncements is found, the radiostops seeking and TRAF displays.If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, NO TRAFdisplays.



If TRAF displays, press the TRAFbutton to turn off the trafficannouncements.

The radio plays the trafficannouncement if the volume is low.The radio interrupts the play of a CDif the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

Finding a Program Type (PTY)Station

To select and find a PTY station:

1. Turn the P-TYPE knob. TYPEand a PTY displays.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, toselect a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays,press the SEEK / TYPE buttonto select PTY's first station.

4. To go to another stationwithin that PTY, press theSEEK / TYPE button twice todisplay the PTY and then go toanother station.

To cancel the seek, press theSEEK / TYPE button. This also exitsthe program type seek mode andreturns to the last tuned station.

If both PTY and TRAF (traffic) areon, the radio searches for stationswith the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

If the radio cannot find the desiredprogram type, NONE displays andthe radio returns to the last tunedstation.

SCAN: To scan PTYs, press andhold the SEEK / SCAN until a beepsounds. The radio goes to a station,plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency):Alternate frequency lets the radioswitch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press andhold BAND for two seconds. AF ONdisplays. The radio could switch tostations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off,press and hold BAND again for2 seconds. AF OFF displays. Theradio does not switch to otherstations.

DISPL (Display): Press to changewhat information displays whileusing RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY (program type), andthe name of the program(if available).

Setting Preset PTYs Only

The six pushbuttons have factoryPTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs(six FM1 and six FM2), can beprogrammed on the numberedpushbuttons. To program PTYs:

1. Press BAND to select FM1or FM2.

2. Turn the P‐TYPE knob toactivate program type selectmode. TYPE and the lastselected PTY displays.



3. Turn the P‐TYPE knob to selecta PTY.

4. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered pushbuttons until abeep sounds. When thatnumbered pushbutton ispressed, the PTY that was set,returns.

5. Repeat the steps for eachpushbutton.

Setting Preset Stations

If the radio does not have XM, up to18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, andsix AM) can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons.

If the radio has XM, up to30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,six AM, six XM1, and six XM2) canbe programmed on the sixnumbered pushbuttons.

To program either radio:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered pushbuttons until theradio beeps once. When thatnumbered pushbutton is pressedagain, the station that wasstored, returns.


Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service that isbased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is required toreceive the XM service. If XMService needs to be reactivated, theradio will display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel XM1.

For more information, contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Finding a Program Type (PTY)Channel

To select and find a PTY:

1. Turn the P-TYPE knob. TYPEand a PTY displays.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, toselect a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays,press the SEEK / TYPE buttonto select PTY's first station.

4. To go to another station withinthat PTY, pess the SEEK / TYPEbutton twice to display the PTYand then go to another station.

To cancel the seek, press theSEEK / TYPE button. This also exitsthe program type seek mode andreturns to the last tuned station.



If the radio cannot find the desiredprogram type, NONE displays andthe radio returns to the last tunedstation.

Finding an XM Channel

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2(if equipped). The selectiondisplays.

DISPL (Display): Press to retrievefour different categories ofinformation related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title,Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

q TUNE r : Turn to select XMChannels.

q SEEK r : Press to go to theprevious or next channel and staythere.

q SCAN r : Press and hold formore than two seconds, SCANdisplays and the radio beeps once.The radio goes to a channel, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext channel. Press q or r again,to stop scanning presets.

To scan preset channels, pressand hold q or r for more thanfour seconds, PSCN displays andthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a preset channel, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the nextpreset channel. Press q or r again,to stop scanning presets.

Setting Preset Channels

If the radio has XM, up to30 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, 6 AM,6 XM1, and 6 XM2) can beprogrammed on the six numberedpushbuttons.

To program either radio:

1. Tune in the desired channel.

2. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered pushbuttons until theradio beeps once. When thatnumbered pushbutton is pressedagain, the channel that wasstored, returns.


XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Updating: The encryption code inthe receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.



No Signl: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading: The radio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Off Air: This channel is notcurrently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavl: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

Unauth: This channel is blocked orcannot be received with your XMSubscription package.

No Info: No artist, song title,category, or text information isavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Subscription Please Renew:XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

NotFound: No artist, song title,category, or text information isavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

XM Lock: The XM receiver in yourvehicle could have previously beenin another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingyour vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

Radio ID: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check XM: If this message doesnot clear within a short period oftime, the receiver could have a fault.Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.



AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference, somestatic can occur, especially aroundtall buildings or hills, causing thesound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base. If themast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tighten byhand until fully seated plusone quarter turn.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.



Audio Players

CD Player

Care of The CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised, due to the riskof contaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep

the CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R quality,the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-Rhas been handled. Handle themcarefully. Store CD-R(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Playing a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it in,and READING displays. The CDshould begin playing. To insert a CDwith the ignition off, first press theZ (eject) button or theDISPL knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts toplay where it stopped, if it was thelast selected audio source.

When the CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.



The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

3 REV (Fast Reverse): Press andhold to reverse quickly within atrack. Press and hold for less thantwo seconds to reverse at 10 timesthe normal playing speed. Pressand hold for more than two secondsto reverse at 20 times the normalplaying speed. Release to play thetrack.

4 FWD (Fast Forward): Press andhold to advance quickly within atrack. Press and hold for less thantwo seconds to advance at six timesthe normal playing speed. Pressand hold for more than two secondsto advance at 17 times the normalplaying speed. Release to play thetrack.

6 RDM (Random): Press to hearthe tracks in random, rather thansequential, order. RDM ON displays.RDM and the track number displayswhen each track starts to play.Press again to turn off random play.RDM OFF displays.

q SEEK r : Press the left arrow togo to the start of the current or theprevious track. Press the right arrowto go to the start of the next track.Pressing either arrow for more thantwo seconds scans the next tracks,playing the first eight seconds ofeach track until all of the trackshave been previewed. Press eitherarrow again to stop scanning and toplay the track.

q TUNE r : Turn to go to theprevious or next track.

DISPL (Display): Press to see howlong the current track has beenplaying. ET and the elapsed time ofthe track displays. To change thedefault on the display (track orelapsed time), press until you seethe desired display, then press andhold for two seconds. The radiobeeps once. The selected display isnow the default.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactiveCD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to playa CD when listening to the radio.The CD symbol displays when a CDis loaded.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD.Eject can be activated with eitherthe ignition or radio off. CDs can beloaded with the ignition and radio offif this button is pressed first.



Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

MP3/WMA CD-R Disc Format

If you burn your own MP3/WMAdisc on a personal computer:. Make sure the MP3/WMA files

are recorded on a CD-R disc.. Make sure playlists have a .m3u

or .wpl extension, other fileextensions might not work.

. Files can be recorded with avariety of fixed or variable bitrates. Song title, artist name,and album are displayed by theradio when recorded using ID3tags version 1 and 2.

. Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

. Make sure to finalize the discwhen burning an MP3/WMAdisc, using multiple sessions.It is usually better to burn thedisc all at once.

The player is able to read and playa maximum of 253 folders,50 playlists, 20 sessions, and949 files. Long file names, foldernames, or playlist names may usemore disc memory space thannecessary. To conserve space onthe disc, minimize the length of thefile, folder, or playlist names. AnMP3/WMA CD-R that was recordedusing no file folders can also beused. The system can support up to11 folders in depth, though, keep thedepth of the folders to a minimum inorder to keep down the complexityand confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback. If aCD contains more than themaximum of 253 folders,50 playlists, 20 sessions, and949 files, the player lets you access

and navigate up to the maximum,but all items over the maximum areplayed.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, thedirectory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under theroot directory are accessed prior toany root directory folders. However,playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advancesto the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audiofiles. The empty folder does notdisplay.



No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functionshave no function on a CD that wasrecorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located underthe root folder. The folder down andthe folder up buttons searchplaylists (Px) first and then go to theroot folder. When the radio displaysthe name of the folder, the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of Play

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. If the CD does not contain anyplaylists, then play begins fromthe first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks fromthe root directory have played,play continues from filesaccording to their numericallisting. After playing the lasttrack from the last folder, playbegins again at the first track ofthe first folder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless youhave chosen the folder mode as thedefault display. See DISPL (display)later in this section for moreinformation. The new track namedisplays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.



Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists whichwere created by WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited. Theseplaylists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it in,and READING displays. The CDshould begin playing and the CDsymbol displays. If you want toinsert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress theZ button or theDISPL knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts toplay where it stopped, if it was thelast selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

1 FLDx (Previous Folder): Pressthis button to go to the first track inthe previous folder. Pressing thisbutton while in folder random modetakes you to the previous folder andplays the tracks in random order inthat folder.

2 FLDw (Next Folder): Press thisbutton to go to the first track in thenext folder. Pressing this buttonwhile in folder random mode takesthe CD to the next folder and playsthe tracks in random order in thatfolder.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and holdthis button to reverse quickly withina track. Press and hold this buttonfor less than two seconds to reverseat 10 times the normal playingspeed. Press and hold it for morethan two seconds to reverse at20 times the normal playing speed.Release this button to play thetrack.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and holdthis button to advance quickly withina track. Press and hold this buttonfor less than two seconds toadvance at 10 times the normalplaying speed. Press and hold it formore than two seconds to advanceat 20 times the normal playingspeed. Release this button to playthe track.

6 RDM (Random): To play thetracks in random order in the currentfolder or playlist, press and releasethis button. FLDRRDM (folderrandom) displays. Once all of thetracks in the current folder or playlisthave played, the system moves tothe next folder or playlist and playsall of the tracks in random order.

To play all the tracks in randomorder on the CD, press and hold thisbutton for two seconds. A beepsounds and DISC RDM (discrandom) displays. This feature doesnot work with playlists.



When in random, pressing andreleasing either SEEK arrow takesthe CD to the previous or to the nextrandom track.

Press and release this button againto turn off random play. NO RDM(no random) displays.

q SEEK r : Press the leftSEEK arrow to go to the start of theprevious track. Press the rightSEEK arrow to go to the start of thenext track. Pressing either SEEKarrow for more than two secondssearches the previous or next tracksat two tracks per second. Releasethe button to stop searching and toplay the track.

q TUNE r : Turn to reverse oradvance through the tracks in allfolders or playlists. The tracknumber and file name displays foreach track. Turning this knob whilein random reverses or advances thetracks in sequential order.

DISPL (Display): Press this knobto switch between track mode,folder/playlist mode, and time of daymode. The display shows onlyeight characters, but there can beup to four pages of text. If there aremore than eight characters in thesong, folder, or playlist name,pressing this knob withintwo seconds takes you to the nextpage of text. If there are no otherpages to be shown, pressing thisknob within two seconds takes youto the next display mode.. Track mode displays the current

track number and the ID3 tagsong name.

. Folder/playlist mode displays thecurrent folder or playlist numberand the folder/playlist name.

. Time of day mode displays thetime of day and the ID3 tagsong name.

To change the default on thedisplay, press the DISPL knob untilyou see the desired display, thenpress and hold this knob fortwo seconds. The radio producesone beep and the selected displayis now the default.

INFO (Information): INFO displayswhen a current track has ID3 taginformation. Press this button todisplay the artist name and albumcontained in the tag. INFOdisappears from the display whenthe information in the ID3 tag hasfinished being read.

BAND: Press this button to listen tothe radio when a CD is playing. Theinactive CD remains inside the radiofor future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press thisbutton to play a CD when listeningto the radio. The CD symbolilluminates on the display when aCD is loaded.



Z (Eject): Press this button toeject a CD. Eject can activate whileeither the ignition or radio is off.CDs can be loaded with the ignitionand radio off if this button is pressedfirst.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD comes out, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. You are driving on a very roughroad. When the road becomessmoother, the CD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. The format of the CD might notbe compatible. See “Using anMP3” later in this section.

. There could have been aproblem while burning the CD.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.



To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing aPhone” in this section for moreinformation.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Thesystem can be used while the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with theBluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.



Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information say “Help”while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the g button, located on thedriver side of the instrument panelnear the headlamp controls, tooperate the Bluetooth system.

g (Push To Talk): Press to answerincoming calls, to confirm systeminformation, and to start speechrecognition.

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar® Hands‐FreeCalling, if available. Refer to theOnStar owner's guide for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.



. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command

can be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal IdentificationNumber (PIN).

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN that was provided in Step 3.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”


3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.



Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.


3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are useddelete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands Free CallingDirectory and the OnStar Turn byTurn Destinations Directory.

Using the “Store” Command

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Digit Store.”



3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands FreeCalling Directory and theOnStarTurn by Turn DestinationsDirectory.

To delete all name tags:

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.



If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command

1. Press and release g.2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle. Pressand release g to answer the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

. Press and release g to answeran incoming call when anothercall is active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press and release g again toreturn to the original call.

. To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original callwith no action.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press andrelease g.

2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press g to link all the callerstogether.



Ending a Call

To end a call:

1. Press and release g.2. Say “End Call.”

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press g , and thensay “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press g , and thensay “Un‐mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio From theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem From a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press g for more thantwo seconds. The audio transfers tothe vehicle. If the audio does nottransfer to the vehicle, use the audiotransfer feature on the cell phone.See your cell phone manufacturer'suser guide for more information.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice Pass‐Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.This feature can be used to verballyaccess contacts stored in the cellphone.

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command

can be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.”. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone's operatinginstructions.



Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu driven phone system. Accountnumbers can also be stored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press g. The system responds“Ready,” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephonebook and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theabove sections on Deleting a PairedPhone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑22 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Recirculation


8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature of the air inside thevehicle.

9 (Fan Control): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

If the knob is set on “0” (zero), someoutside air will still enter the vehicleand will be directed according to theposition of the mode knob.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnthe knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to change thecurrent airflow mode.

Select from the following modes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and floor and side windowoutlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to thefloor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets. Recirculation cannotbe selected while in floor modebecause this could cause theinterior window to fog.

/ (Floor/Defog): This modeclears the windows of fog ormoisture. Air is directed to the floor,windshield, and side window outlets.When this mode is selected, thesystem runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outsidetemperature is near freezing orbelow. Recirculation is not availablein this mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.When this mode is selected, thesystem runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outsidetemperature is near, or belowfreezing. Recirculation is notavailable in this mode.


Climate Controls 8-3

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light on thebutton comes on to show that the airconditioning is on.

The fan control must be on to usethe air conditioning.

There might be a slight change inengine performance when the airconditioning compressor shuts offand turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to makeadjustments to help with fueleconomy while still maintaining theselected temperature.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light on the button comeson to show that the recirculationmode is on. This mode recirculatesand helps to quickly cool the airinside the vehicle. It can be used toprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor/defog, defrost,or defogging modes. If recirculationis selected in these modes, theindicator will flash or not come on.

Air VentsUse the thumbwheel on the outletsto change the direction of theair flow.

Lift up or push down on thethumbwheel located in the center ofthe outlet to direct the air up ordown, or slide the thumbwheel tothe left or right to direct the airflowfrom side‐to‐side.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow or

leaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.


8-4 Climate Controls

2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-12Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-14Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-17Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-26Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Shifting out of Park (AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Parking (ManualTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-36

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-38

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-48Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-50

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-53Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-54Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑11.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious— or evenfatal— collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.



BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulicpower steering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10‑25.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.



Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.



. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road Driving

Off-Road Driving

Four-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout four-wheel drive andvehicles not equipped with AllTerrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)tires must not be driven off-roadexcept on a level, solid surface. Tocontact the tire manufacturer formore information about the originalequipment tires, see the LimitedWarranty and Owner AssistanceInformation manual.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed.

{ WARNING

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,

and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if equipped, are properlyattached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lowerair dam.

Notice: Operating the vehicle forextended periods without thefront fascia lower air daminstalled can cause improper airflow to the engine. Re‐attach thefront fascia air dam after off-roaddriving.



Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑19 and Tires onpage 10‑47.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn on page 9‑34.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assessthe steepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.



When driving on hills:. Use a low gear and keep a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Maintain a slow speed.. When possible, drive straight up

or down the hill.. Slow down when approaching

the top of the hill.. Use headlamps even during the

day to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle has the two‐speedautomatic transfer case, shiftingthe transfer case to N (Neutral)can cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission is inP (Park) for an automatictransmission or any gear positionfor a manual transmission. This isbecause the N (Neutral) positionon the transfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If leavingthe vehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park) for an automatictransmission or any gear positionfor a manual transmission. Shiftthe transfer case to any positionbut N (Neutral).



. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) for anautomatic transmission or1 (First) for a manualtransmission and then restartthe engine.. If driving uphill when the

vehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.

. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.



3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift an automatictransmission into P (Park) or amanual transmission into1 (First), and turn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it – a rock, a rut,etc. – and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ WARNING

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.



Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving inmud – the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. Keep the vehiclemoving to avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

Notice: Do not drive throughstanding water if it is deepenough to cover the wheel hubs,axles or exhaust pipe. Deep watercan damage the axle and othervehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes on theignition system and the vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if youget the exhaust pipe under water.While the exhaust pipe is underwater, you will not be able to startthe engine. When going throughwater, the brakes get wet, and itmight take longer to stop. SeeDriving on Wet Roads onpage 9‑12.



After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,or chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a firehazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. Refer to theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.



Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑47.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.



Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.



. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑44 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑34.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.



To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking Your vehicle to get ItOut” later in this section.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑68.



Rocking the Vehicle to getIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. For four-wheel drivevehicles, shift into 4HI. Turn off anytraction system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheels aslittle as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out.Recovery hooks can be used, if thevehicle has them. If the vehicle doesneed to be towed out, see Towingthe Vehicle on page 10‑91.

Recovery Hooks

{ WARNING

Never pull on recovery hooksfrom the side. The hooks couldbreak and you and others couldbe injured. When using recoveryhooks, always pull the vehiclestraight out.

Notice: Never use recoveryhooks to tow the vehicle. Yourvehicle could be damaged and itwould not be covered bywarranty.

For vehicles with recovery hooks atthe front of the vehicle, you can usethem if you are stuck off-road andneed to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B‐pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door latchpost. Vehicle's without a centerpillar, like extended cab models,will have the Tire and LoadingInformation label attached to thedriver side extended cab door,



above the door latch post. TheTire and Loading Informationlabel shows the number ofoccupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑47 and Tire Pressureon page 10‑54.

There is also importantinformation on the Certification/Tire label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.



6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing onpage 9‑62 for importantinformation on towing atrailer, towing safety, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)



Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,cargo, and any accessories orequipment added to your vehicleafter it left the factory shouldnever exceed your vehicle'scapacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thebottom section of the driver sidecenter pillar (B-pillar) or on theend of the driver side instrumentpanel. Vehicles without a centerpillar, like extended cab models,will have the Certification/Tirelabel attached to the edge of thedriver side, extended cab door,below the door latch post. Thelabel shows the Gross Vehicle



Weight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,cargo, and trailer tongue weight,if pulling a trailer.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

If the load is heavy, it should bespread out.

Similar appearing vehicles mayhave different GVWRs andcapacity weights. Please noteyour vehicle's Certification/Tirelabel or consult your dealer foradditional details.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change yourweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehicle theright way.



Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued). Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving” underOff-Road Driving on page 9‑6.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle Weightrating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.



Two-Tiered Loading

For vehicles with a six foot bed,an upper load platform can becreated by positioning four 5 cm(2 inches) by 15 cm (6 inches)wooden planks across the widthof the pickup box. The planksmust be inserted in the pickupbox depressions.

When using this upper loadplatform, be sure the load issecurely tied down to prevent itfrom shifting. The load's centerof gravity should be positionedin a zone over the rear axle.

Any load that extends beyondthe vehicle's taillamp area mustbe properly marked according tolocal laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceedthe Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the rear axle.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removableitems, you may need to put alimit on how many people youcarry inside your vehicle. Besure to weigh your vehiclebefore you buy and install thenew equipment.

Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Remember not to exceedthe Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the rear axle.

A reinforcement kit for mountinga toolbox is recommended. Seeyour dealer.

Truck-Camper LoadingInformationThe vehicle was neitherdesigned nor intended to carry aslide-in type camper.

Notice: Adding a slide-incamper or similar equipmentto the vehicle can damage it,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not install aslide-in camper or similarequipment on the vehicle.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑62 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply theregular brake pedal.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.



A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑31.

This position locks the ignition.It also locks the transmission onautomatic transmission vehicles.It locks the steering wheel onmanual transmission vehicles. Thekey can only be removed inLOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑45.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein P (Park) to turn the ignition switchto LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.



B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is theposition in which you can operatethe electrical accessories or itemsplugged into the accessory poweroutlets. On automatic transmissionvehicles, this position unlocks theignition. On manual transmissionvehicles, it unlocks the ignition andsteering wheel . Use this position ifthe vehicle must be pushed ortowed.

C (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. This positioncan also be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition on automatic transmissionvehicles.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart your vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be inN (Neutral) and the parking brakeengaged. Hold the clutch pedaldown to the floor and start theengine. The vehicle will not start ifthe clutch pedal is not all theway down.



Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage.

To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter 5‐10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be floodedwith too much gasoline. Pushthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool.

When the engine starts, let go ofthe key and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C (0°F ). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting. Aninternal thermostat in the plug-endof the cord may exist which willprevent engine coolant heateroperation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated in the enginecompartment behind theunderhood fuse block on thedriver side of the vehicle.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord to prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 20 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Wipers. Power Windows

These features work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,power to these features continue towork for up to 20 minutes or until adoor is opened.

Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑58.

1. Hold the brake pedal down withyour right foot and set theparking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑45for more information.

{ WARNING

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll— evenif the shift lever is in P (Park)— ifthe transfer case is in Neutral. So,be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear, two-wheel high (2H) orfour-wheel high (4H) orfour-wheel low (4L)— not inNeutral.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pulling the lever toward youand moving it up as far as itwill go.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the key, the vehicle is inP (Park).



Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shift leveraway from P (Park) without firstpulling it toward you. If you can, theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driver

seat. To find out how, see “ShiftingInto Park (Automatic Transmission)”in this section.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pullthe shift lever out of P (Park).

Shifting out of Park(Automatic Transmission)The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply thebrake pedal before you can shiftfrom P (Park) when the ignition isON/RUN. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑36.



The shift lock control system isdesigned to do the following:. Prevent the ignition key from

being removed unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock control system isalways functional except in the caseof a dead battery or low voltage(less than 9 V) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑87 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever all theway into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced.

Parking (ManualTransmission)If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before you get out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever intoR (Reverse), and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift leverhas been placed into R (Reverse)with the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,remove the key and release theclutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or if thevehicle is pulling a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑58.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑34.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenit is on fairly level ground, alwaysset the parking brake and movethe automatic transmission shiftlever to P (Park), or the manualtransmission shift lever to Neutral.

{ WARNING

Four-wheel drive vehicles with thetransfer case in N (Neutral) willallow the vehicle to roll, even ifthe automatic transmission shiftlever is in P (Park). So, be surethe transfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral). Alwaysset the parking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑31.

If pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑58.



AutomaticTransmission

The vehicle has a shift lever on thesteering column.

It features an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument cluster. This display ispowered anytime the shift lever iscapable of being moved out ofP (Park). This means that if theignition is turned off, but not inLOCK/OFF, there will be a smallcurrent drain on the battery whichcould discharge the battery over aperiod of time. If you need to leavethe key in the ignition but not inLOCK/OFF for an extended period,it is recommended that you

disconnect the battery cable fromthe battery to prevent dischargingthe battery.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑31.If you are pulling a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips on page 9‑58.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply thebrake pedal before you can shiftfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever by pushing the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park(Automatic Transmission) onpage 9‑32.



R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice, or sandwithout damaging the transmission,see If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9‑17.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is are already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

The transmission will shift downto the next gear and the vehiclewill have more power.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑5.



3 (Third): This position is also usedfor normal driving. However, itreduces vehicle speed more thanD (Drive) without using the brakes.You might choose 3 (Third) insteadof D (Drive) when driving on hilly,winding roads, or when towing atrailer, so there is less shiftingbetween gears and when goingdown a steep hill.

2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) to helpcontrol vehicle speed on steepmountain roads, but then you wouldalso want to use the brakes offand on.

1 (First): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than2 (Second) without using the brakes.You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud. If the shiftlever is put in 1 (First) while thevehicle is moving forward, thetransmission will not shift into firstgear until the vehicle is going slowlyenough.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

Manual Transmission

This is your shift pattern.

Here is how to operate the manualtransmission:

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then, slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as youslowly press down on theaccelerator pedal.



You can shift into 1 (First) when youare going less than 30 km/h(20 mph). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shiftinto 1 (First), put the shift lever inNeutral and let up on the clutch.Then press the clutch pedal backdown and shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth):Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and5 (Fifth) the same way you do for2 (Second). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine.

R (Reverse): To back up, press theclutch pedal. After the vehicle stops,shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal. If it is hard toshift, let the shift lever return toNeutral and release the clutchpedal. Then press the clutch againand shift into R (Reverse). Do notattempt to shift into 5 (Fifth) prior toshifting into R (Reverse). Thetransmission has a lock out featurewhich prevents a 5 (Fifth) gear toR (Reverse) gear shift.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

Use R (Reverse), along with theparking brake, for parking thevehicle.

Shift Speeds

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.



Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has four-wheel drive,you can send the engine's drivingpower to all four wheels forextra traction. To get the bestperformance out of four-wheeldrive, you must be familiar with itsoperation. Read this section beforeusing four-wheel drive. You shoulduse two-wheel drive high for mostnormal driving conditions.

Notice: Driving on clean, drypavement in four-wheel drive foran extended period of time cancause premature wear on thevehicle's powertrain. Do not driveon clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel Drive for extendedperiods of time.

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and a differentsize spare tire is installed, do notdrive in four-wheel drive until theflat tire is repaired and/orreplaced. The vehicle could bedamaged and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the warranty.Never use four-wheel drive whena different size spare tire isinstalled on the vehicle.

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the compactspare tire is installed on thevehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have the flattire repaired and/or replaced. Youcould damage the vehicle, andthe repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Neveruse four-wheel drive when thecompact spare tire is installed onthe vehicle.

The transfer case buttons arelocated to the right of the steeringwheel on the instrument panel.



Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2 m 4 m 4 n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10‑91 or Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑91 for further information.

Shifting into Four‐Wheel Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak® off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 9‑47and StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑48 for more information.

Use these buttons to shift into andout of four-wheel drive. You canchoose from the following:

2 m (Two-Wheel High): This settingis for driving in most street andhighway situations. The front axle isnot engaged in two-wheel drive.

{ WARNING

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake onpage 9‑45.

N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle.

4 m (Four-Wheel High): Thissetting engages the front axle tohelp drive the vehicle. Usefour-wheel high when you needextra traction, such as on snowy oricy roads, or in most off-roadsituations.



4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This settingalso engages the front axle to giveyou extra traction. It sends themaximum power to all four wheels.You might choose four-wheel low ifyou were driving off-road in sand,mud, or deep snow and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into Four‐Wheel Low willturn Traction Control andStabiliTrak® off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 9‑47and StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑48 for more information.

Indicator lights in the buttons showyou which setting you are in. Theindicator lights will come on brieflywhen you turn on the ignition andone will stay on the selected setting.If the lights do not come on, youshould take the vehicle in forservice. An indicator light will flashwhile shifting. It will stay on whenthe shift is completed.

If the transfer case does not shift, itwill return to the last chosen setting.

Shifting from Two-Wheel High toFour-Wheel High

Press and release the Four-WheelHigh button. This can be done atany speed, and the front axle willlock automatically.

Shifting from Four-Wheel High toTwo-Wheel High

Press and release the Two-WheelHigh button. This can be done atany speed, and the front axle willunlock automatically.

It is normal to hear and feel thevehicle's transfer case shift intoFour-Wheel High. If you shift withthe vehicle stopped, the indicatorlight may still flash slowly. It may benecessary to shift the transmissionmomentarily into R (Reverse) andD (Drive), for an automatictransmission, or R (Reverse) and1 (First) for a manual transmissionto have the light stop flashing.

Shifting from Two-Wheel High orFour-Wheel High toFour-Wheel Low

To shift from Two-Wheel High orFour-Wheel High to Four-WheelLow, the vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission in N (Neutral)for an automatic transmission or theclutch pedal pressed for a manualtransmission. The preferred methodfor shifting into Four-Wheel Low isto have your vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

Press and release the Four-WheelLow button. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Low indicator light tostop flashing and stay on beforeshifting the transmission into gear orreleasing the clutch pedal.

If the Four-Wheel Low button ispressed when the vehicle is in gearand/or moving faster than 5 km/h(3 mph), the Four-Wheel Lowindicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift.



Shifting from Four-Wheel Low toTwo-Wheel High orFour-Wheel High

To shift from Four-Wheel Low toTwo-Wheel High or Four-WheelHigh, the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission in N (Neutral)for an automatic transmission or theclutch pedal pressed for a manualtransmission. The preferred methodfor shifting out of Four-Wheel Low isto have your vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

Press and release the Four-WheelHigh or Two-Wheel High button. Youmust wait for the Four-Wheel Highor Two-Wheel High indicator light tostop flashing and stay on beforeshifting the transmission into gear orreleasing the clutch pedal.

If the Four-Wheel High orTwo-Wheel High button is pressedwhen the vehicle is in gear and/ormoving faster than 5 km/h (3 mph),the Four-Wheel High or Two-WheelHigh indicator light will flash for30 seconds but not complete theshift.

Shifting to Neutral

Use N (Neutral) when you plan totow the vehicle. See RecreationalVehicle Towing on page 10‑91 fortowing instructions. To shift thetransfer case into N (Neutral) do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Press the regular brake pedaland shift the transmission inN (Neutral), or press in the clutchfor vehicles with a manualtransmission.

4. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel High.

5. Press and hold the Two-WheelHigh and Four-Wheel Lowbuttons at the same time for10 seconds. The N (Neutral) lightwill come on when the transfercase shift to N (Neutral) iscomplete.

6. Press and hold the regular brakepedal and shift the transmissionto R (Reverse) for one second,then shift the transmission toD (Drive) for one second,or 1 (First) for vehicles withmanual transmissions, and letout the clutch to insure thetransfer case is in N (Neutral).If the transfer case is not inN (Neutral), repeat thisprocedure starting at Step 3.



7. Turn the engine off by turningthe key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

8. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park), or 1 (First) forvehicles that have a manualtransmission.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Shifting Out of Neutral

After towing the vehicle, you willhave to shift out of N (Neutral) inorder to drive. To shift out ofN (Neutral), do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Start a vehicle with an automatictransmission in P (Park). Use1 (First) for vehicles with amanual transmission.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral), or press the clutchpedal for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

4. Press the button for the desiredtransfer case shift position(Two-Wheel High, Four-WheelHigh, or Four-Wheel Low).

5. After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theindicator light will go out.

6. Release the parking brake.

7. Shift the transmission to thedesired position.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑16.



If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedal is locatedto the left of the brake pedal, nearthe driver door.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down, then push theparking brake pedal down to itsfully-applied position.



A chime will activate and the brakewarning light, located on theinstrument panel, will flash when theparking brake is applied and thevehicle is moving at least 5 km/h(3 mph) for at least three seconds.The chime will deactivate and thelight will turn off when the parkingbrake is set and the vehicle ismoving below 5 km/h (3 mph). SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑15.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Pullthe bottom edge of the lever,

located above the parking brakepedal, with the parking brakesymbol, directly rearward to releasethe parking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the brake systemwarning light will go off.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on any hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑58.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The Traction Control System (TCS)is part of StabiliTrak. TCS limitswheel slip which is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it sensesthat any of the wheels are spinningor beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, TCS applies thebrakes to limit wheel spin and alsoreduces engine power. The systemmay be heard or felt while it isworking. This is normal and doesnot mean there is a problem withthe vehicle.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.

The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spin thewheel(s) excessively while theselights and messages aredisplayed.

TCS can operate on dry roadsunder some conditions. When thishappens, the system may beheard working or a reduction inacceleration may be noticed. This isnormal and does not mean there isa problem with the vehicle.Examples of these conditionsinclude hard acceleration in a turn,an abrupt upshift or downshift of thetransmission or driving on roughroads.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control automaticallydisengages. The cruise controlcan be re-engaged when roadconditions allow. See Cruise Controlon page 9‑50.

The message TRACTION FAULTappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when a TCS orAntilock Brake System (ABS)problem has been detected and thevehicle needs service. When thismessage is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑26.

The TCS/StabiliTrak light will flashon the instrument panel clusterwhen the TCS system or StabiliTrakis both on and activated.



The TCS/StabiliTrak button islocated on the instrument panel.

To turn off TCS, press and releasethe TCS/StabiliTrak button. TheStabiliTrak Off light comes on in theinstrument panel cluster, and TRACOFF comes on the DIC. To turnTCS back on, press and release theTCS/StabiliTrak button.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect the vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑4.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has an electronicstability control system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before thevehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).

In some cases, it may takeapproximately two miles of drivingbefore the system initializes.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.The cruise control can bere-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑50.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, a SERVICE STAB SYSmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑26 for more information.When this message is displayed,the system is not working. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

StabiliTrak and Traction Control(TCS) come on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started andthe systems are reset with eachignition cycle. However, when thetransfer case is placed inFour-Wheel-Low mode, StabiliTrakis automatically disabled.



See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 10‑30 for more information.It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the TCS portion of thesystem off if the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice, or snow, and it isnecessary to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. If traction controlis turned off, only the brake-tractioncontrol portion of traction controlwill work. The engine speedmanagement will be disabled. In thismode, engine power is not reducedautomatically and the drive wheelscan spin more freely. This cancause the brake-traction control toactivate constantly. See If theVehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑17.

The TCS/StabiliTrak light will flashon the instrument panel clusterwhen the TCS system or StabiliTrakis both on and activated.

The TCS/StabiliTrak button islocated on the instrument panel.

To turn off TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton until the TRAC OFF andSTAB SYS OFF messages come onthe DIC and the StabiliTrak Off lightcomes on the instrument panel. Toturn TCS and StabiliTrak back on,press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button.

When the TCS or StabiliTrak systemis turned off, the StabiliTrak Off lightand the appropriate TRAC OFF orSTAB SYS OFF message will bedisplayed on the DIC. The vehiclewill still have brake-traction controlwhen TCS or StabiliTrak is off, butwill not be able to use the enginespeed management system. TheTCS/StabiliTrak light flashes wheneither system is actively working.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑47 for more information.



Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow,mud, ice, sand or gravel. It workslike a standard axle most of thetime, but when traction is low, thisfeature allows the drive wheel withthe most traction to move thevehicle.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If the vehicle's StabiliTrak® /TractionControl System (TCS) begins tolimit wheel spin while the cruisecontrol is on, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑48 orTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑47. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, thecruise control can be turnedback on.

These controls are located at theend of the multifunction lever.

9 (Off): Turns the system off.

R (On): Turns the system on.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use tomake the vehicle accelerate orresume a previously set speed.



rT (Set): Press the button atthe end of the lever to set thespeed.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. Move the cruise control lever to R.2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press rT at the end of thelever and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

This light on the instrument panelcluster comes on while the cruisecontrol is on.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,move the cruise control lever brieflyfrom R to S . The vehicle returns tothe previous set speed and staysthere.

If the lever is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle keeps goingfaster until the lever is released orthe brake is applied. Do not hold thelever at resume/accelerate, unlessyou want the vehicle to go faster.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Use the accelerator pedal to get

to the higher speed. PressrT at the end of the lever,then release the button andthe accelerator pedal. If theaccelerator pedal is held longerthan 60 seconds, cruise controlwill turn off.

. Move the cruise lever from R toS . Hold it until the desiredspeed is reached, and thenrelease the lever.

. To increase the vehicle speed insmall amounts, move the leverbriefly to S .



Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,

. Press and hold rT until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,briefly press rT .

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruise controlis disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedal orlightly tap or press the clutch, formanual transmissions.

. To turn off the cruise control,move the cruise control leverto9 .

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by moving thecruise control lever to9 or if thevehicle is turned off.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814 inthe United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑54 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emission



control system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.



Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.



{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑96.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. If the fuel cap is notproperly installed, the FUEL CAPmessage appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and thecheck engine light will be lit on theinstrument panel cluster. See FuelSystem Messages on page 5‑25and Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13 for more information.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”



For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑91. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑91.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Pulling A Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many different laws,

including speed limit restrictions,having to do with trailering.Make sure the rig will be legal,not only where you live but alsowhere you will be driving.A good source for thisinformation can be state orprovincial police.

. Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” in TowingEquipment on page 9‑66.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

. Vehicles with automatictransmissions can tow inD (Drive), but you may want toshift to a lower gear selection ifthe transmission shifts too often(e.g., under heavy loads and/orhilly conditions). If the vehiclehas a manual transmission it isbetter not to use thehighest gear.

Three important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The weight on the vehicle's tires

Driving with a Trailer

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

To maximize safety when towinga trailer:

. Have the exhaust systeminspected for leaks and makenecessary repairs beforestarting a trip.

. Never drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑34.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Get to knowthe rig before setting out for theopen road. Get acquainted with thefeel of handling and braking with theadded weight of the trailer. Andalways keep in mind that the vehicleyou are driving is now longer andnot as responsive as the vehicle isby itself.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirror adjustments. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thevehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes areworking. This checks the electricalconnection at the same time.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

While towing a trailer or whenexposed to long periods ofsunshine, the floor of the truck bedmay become very warm. Avoidputting items in the truck bed thatmight be affected by high ambienttemperatures.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.



Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason you maythink other drivers are seeing thesignal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

Vehicles with automatictransmissions can tow in D (Drive),but you may want to shift to a lowergear selection if the transmissionshifts too often (e.g., under heavyloads and/or hilly conditions). If thevehicle has a manual transmission itis better not to use the highest gear.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with anautomatic transmission in P (Park)or a manual transmission inN (Neutral) with the parking brakeapplied, for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑23.



Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet forvehicles with an automatictransmission, or into gear forvehicles with a manualtransmission. Turn the wheelsinto the curb if facing downhill orinto traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park) for vehicles with anautomatic transmission or intogear for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

5. If the vehicle hasfour-wheel-drive, be sure thetransfer case is in a drive gearand not in N (Neutral). SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 10‑30for more information.

6. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine. Shift into a gear. Release the parking brake

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 or the Index for moreinformation. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.



Trailer Towing

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To pull a trailer correctly, followthe advice in this section and seeyour dealer for importantinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

2WD Regular Cab

2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission 3.73 1 542 kg (3,400 lbs) 3 175 kg (7,000 lbs)

2.9L L4 Manual Transmission 3.73 1 089 kg (2,400 lbs) 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs)


2WD Extended Cab


2.9L L4 Manual Transmission 3.73 998 kg (2,200 lbs) 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs)


5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission3.423.73

2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs)

5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission,ZQ8 Sport Suspension

3.42 1 814 kg (4,000 lbs) 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs)

2WD Crew Cab





2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs)



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission,ZQ8 Sport Suspension

3.42 1 724 kg (3,800 lbs) 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs)

4WD Regular Cab




4WD Extended Cab





2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs)

4WD Crew Cab


5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission3.424.10 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.



Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. See

Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑19for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) shouldbe 10 percent to 15 percent of thetotal loaded trailer weight, up to amaximum of 226 kg (500 lbs) with aweight carrying hitch.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.



Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Certification/Tire labellocated at the bottom of the centerpillar on the driver's side of thevehicle, or see Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑19. Make sure not to goover the GVW limit for the vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weightof the trailer tongue. If using aweight distributing hitch, make surenot to go over the rear axle limitbefore applying the weightdistribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.

Weight-Distributing Hitchesand Weight Carrying Hitches

A step bumper hitch can be used fortrailers up to 907 kg (2,000 lbs) totalweight, and 90 kg (200 lbs) tongueweight.

Notice: If a step-bumper hitch isused, the bumper could bedamaged in sharp turns. Makesure there is ample room whenturning to avoid contact betweenthe trailer and the bumper.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. For trailers up to907 kg (2,000 lbs) safety chains maybe attached to the attaching pointson the bumper. For heavier trailers,

follow the trailer or hitchmanufacturer's recommendation forattaching safety chains. Alwaysleave just enough slack so the rigcan turn. Never allow safety chainsto drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Since the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak®, the trailer cannot tapinto the vehicle's hydraulic brakesystem.



Trailer Wiring Harness

The vehicle may be equipped with afour‐pin trailer towing harness. Thisharness has a four‐pin trailerconnector that is attached to abracket on the hitch platform. Thefour‐wire harness contains thefollowing trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal. Brown: Taillamps/Park lamps. White: Ground

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑32 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑33.

Pickup Conversion toChassis CabWe are aware that some vehicleowners might consider having thepickup box removed and acommercial or recreational bodyinstalled. However, we recommendthat conversions of this type not bedone to pickups. Owners should beaware that, as manufactured, thereare differences between a chassiscab and a pickup with the boxremoved which could affect vehiclesafety.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-17Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-23Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-25Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-32Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-34

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-38

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-39Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-48Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-67Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Secondary Latch System . . . 10-82Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-85Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-86

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-91Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.


Vehicle Care 10-3

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑33.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑18.


Vehicle Care 10-5

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑32.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑16.

HoodTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located inside thevehicle on the lower left side ofthe instrument panel.

2. Release the secondary latch onthe hood. It is located below thefront center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop from itsretainer and put the hood propinto the slot in the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenlift the hood to relieve pressure onthe hood prop. Remove the hoodprop from the slot in the hood andreturn the prop to its retainer. Lowerthe hood 25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 in)above the vehicle and release it tolatch fully. Check to make sure thehood is closed and repeat theprocedure if necessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

3.7 L L5 Engine Shown (2.9 L L4 Engine Similar)


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See“Adding Washer Fluid” underWasher Fluid on page 10‑26.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑19.

C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑17.

D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir(low in engine compartment).See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑25.

E. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (If Equipped). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑13.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

G. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑18.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(GND). See Jump Starting onpage 10‑87.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑87.

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid on page 10‑28.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑41.

M. Battery on page 10‑30.

N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir(If Equipped). See HydraulicClutch on page 10‑17.


10-8 Vehicle Care

5.3 L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑17.

B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator(If Equipped). See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑17.

C. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

D. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑19.

E. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (If Equipped). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑13.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

H. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid on page 10‑28.

I. Battery on page 10‑30.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑25.

K. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑41.

L. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑18.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

L4 and L5 Engines

V8 Engine

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscosity


10-12 Vehicle Care

grade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification orequivalent. See “Specification” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or rags

containing used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OILmessage comes on. See Engine OilMessages on page 5‑24. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600mi). It ispossible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmight indicate that an oil change isnot necessary for up to a year. Theengine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedpeople who will perform this workand reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.


Vehicle Care 10-13

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off .

2. Press and release the stem inthe lower center of theinstrument cluster until the OILLIFE message is displayed.

3. Once the alternating OIL LIFEand RESET messages appear,press and hold the stem untilseveral beeps sound. Thisconfirms that the oil life systemhas been reset.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE OIL messagecomes back on when the vehicle isstarted, the engine oil life systemhas not been reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

A good time to check the automatictransmission fluid level is when theengine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and be sureto use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, it may be decided tohave this done at the dealer servicedepartment.

If not taken to the dealer, be sure tofollow all the instructions here, or afalse reading on the dipstick couldresult.

Notice: Too much or too littlefluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transmission fluid levelif the vehicle has been driven:. When outside temperatures are

above 32°C (90°F).. At high speed for quite a while.. In heavy traffic— especially in

hot weather.. While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operatingtemperature, which is 82°C to 93°C(180°F to 200°F).


10-14 Vehicle Care

Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 24 km (15 mi) whenoutside temperatures are above10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)until the engine temperature gaugemoves and then remains steady for10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be madeafter the vehicle has been sitting foreight hours or more with the engineoff, but this is used only as areference. Let the engine run at idlefor five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 10°C (50°F) ormore. If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), the engine may have to idlelonger. Should the fluid level be lowduring this cold check, check thefluid hot before adding fluid.Checking the fluid hot gives a moreaccurate reading of the fluid level.

Checking the Fluid Level

To prepare the vehicle:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With foot on the brake pedal,move the shift lever througheach gear range, pausing forabout three seconds in eachrange. Then, position the shiftlever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle forthree minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine:

1. Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel.

The automatic transmissiondipstick handle with this symbolon it is located in the enginecompartment on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on location.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and pull it backout again.


Vehicle Care 10-15

3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be in the COLDarea, below the cross-hatchedarea, for a cold check or in theHOT or cross-hatched area for ahot check. Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind oftransmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Add fluid only after checking thetransmission fluid while it is hot.A cold check is used only as areference. If the fluid level is low,add only enough of the proper fluidto bring the level up to the HOT areafor a hot check. It does not takemuch fluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pt). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.. After adding fluid, recheck the

fluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Manual TransmissionFluid

When to Check

A good time to check the manualtransmission fluid is when theengine oil is changed. However, thefluid in the manual transmissiondoes not require changing.

How to Check

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, it may be decided tohave this done at the dealer servicedepartment.

If not taken to the dealer, be sure tofollow all the instructions here, or afalse reading on the dipstick couldresult.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Check the fluid level only whenthe engine is off, the vehicle isparked on a level place and thetransmission is cool enough totouch the transmission case.

After this is done:

1. Remove the fill plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level isup to the bottom of the fillplug hole.

3. If the fluid level is good, installthe plug and be sure it is fullyseated. If the fluid level is low,add more fluid as described inthe next steps.

How to Add Fluid

Here is how to add fluid. Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule todetermine what kind of fluid to use.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

1. Remove the fill plug.

2. Add fluid at the fill plug hole.Add only enough fluid to bringthe fluid level up to the bottom ofthe fill plug hole.

3. Install the fill plug. Be sure theplug is fully seated.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in thevehicle is self-adjusting. The clutchmaster cylinder reservoir is filledwith hydraulic clutch fluid.

The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoircap has this symbol on it. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

It is not necessary to regularlycheck clutch fluid unless a leak inthe system is suspected. Addingfluid will not correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thefluid level in the clutch mastercylinder reservoir and for the properfluid. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

How to Check and Add Fluid

The proper fluid should be added ifthe level does not reach the bottomof the diaphragm when it is in placein the reservoir. See the instructionson the reservoir cap.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter islocated in the engine compartmenton the passenger side of thevehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on location.


10-18 Vehicle Care

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Unfasten the clips that hold thecover on and remove the cover.

2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.

3. Inspect or replace the air filter.See Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑15 todetermine which filter to use.

4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover. Fasten the clips tohold the cover in place.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

2.9 L L4 Engine Shown(3.7 L L5 Engine Similar)

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

C. Radiator Pressure Cap


Vehicle Care 10-19

5.3 L V8 Engine

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑23.


10-20 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/oradditives are used in the vehiclecooling system, the vehicle couldbe damaged. Use only the propermixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for thecooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 formore information.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

It is located toward the rear of theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When the engine is cold,the coolant level should be at FULLCOLD, or a little higher. When theengine is warm, the level could beabove the FULL COLD level.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at least up to theFULL COLD mark. If it is not, therecould be a leak in the coolingsystem.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

When the coolant in the coolantrecovery tank is at the FULL COLDmark, start the vehicle.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.


10-22 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn thepressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about onefull turn.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap toremove it.

3. Fill the radiator with the properDEX‐COOL coolant mixture, upto the base of the filler neck.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑19 for more informationabout the proper coolantmixture.

4. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark.

5. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank, but leave theradiator pressure cap off.


Vehicle Care 10-23

6. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hose canbe felt getting hot. Watch out forthe engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator filler neckmight be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX‐COOL coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of thefiller neck.

8. Replace the pressure cap.

At any time during this procedure ifcoolant begins to flow out of thefiller neck, reinstall thepressure cap.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has a coolanttemperature gauge displayed on theinstrument panel to warn if theengine is overheating. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑9. If the engine is too hot,the air conditioning might stopworking. This is normal and helpscool the engine.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when the warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine and have thevehicle serviced.

The engine cooling fan speedshould increase when idle speed isdoubled by pushing the acceleratorpedal down. If it does not, thevehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven with nocoolant, the vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


10-24 Vehicle Care

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer. See “Driving on

Grades” under Trailer Towing onpage 9‑62.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engineuntil it cools down.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Engine FanThis vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the clutch is not engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases when the clutch engages.So you may hear an increase in fannoise. This is normal and should notbe mistaken as the transmissionslipping or making extra shifts. It ismerely the cooling systemfunctioning properly. The fan willslow down when additional coolingis not required and the clutchdisengages.

This fan noise may also be heardwhen the engine is started. It will goaway as the fan clutch disengages.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated near the front of the enginecompartment, behind the radiator.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Then remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The level should be between theADD and FULL marks. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring thelevel up to the proper range.


10-26 Vehicle Care

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.


Vehicle Care 10-27

BrakesThis vehicle has front disc brakesand rear drum brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Rear drum brakes do not have wearindicators, but if a rear brakerubbing noise is heard, have therear brake linings inspectedimmediately. Rear brake drumsshould be removed and inspectedeach time the tires are removed forrotation or changing. Drum brakeshave an inspection hole to inspectlining wear during scheduled

maintenance. When the front brakepads are replaced, have the rearbrakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes— for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

The fluid level should be above thePP mark. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the PP mark but notover the MAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


10-30 Vehicle Care

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑87 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.


Vehicle Care 10-31

A. Drain Plug

B. Fill Plug

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Remove the plugand add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the fill plughole. Use care not to overtightenthe plug.

What to Use

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Front Axle

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the front axle fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected or anunusual noise is heard. A fluid losscould indicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.



If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, located on thefront axle, some lubricant may needto be added.

When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise the level to12 mm (1/2 in) below the fillplug hole.

When the differential is at operatingtemperature (warm), add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole.

What to Use

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Rear Axle

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless there isa leak suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.



The proper level is from 0mm to10 mm (0 to 3/8 in) below the bottomof the fill plug hole, located on therear axle.

What to Use

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 todetermine which kind of lubricantto use.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑45.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑45.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).

. For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when youpress the key release button.

On all vehicles, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper typeand length, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑15.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damage thewindshield. Any damage that occurswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperblade arm to touch the windshield.

1. To remove the old wiper blades,lift the wiper arm until it locksinto a vertical position.


Vehicle Care 10-35

A. Blade Assembly

B. Arm Assembly

C. Locking Tab

D. Blade Pivot

E. Hook Slot

F. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the bladeassembly pivot locking tab. Pulldown on the blade assembly torelease it from the wiperarm hook.

3. Remove the insert from theblade assembly. The insert hastwo notches at one end that arelocked by bottom claws of theblade assembly. At the notchedend, pull the insert from theblade assembly.

4. To install the new wiper insert,slide the insert (D), notched endlast, into the end with two bladeclaws (A). Slide the insert all theway through the blade claws atthe opposite end (B). The plasticcaps (C) will be forced off as theinsert is fully inserted.

5. Be sure that the notches arelocked by the bottom claws.Make sure that all other clawsare properly locked on bothsides of the insert slots.


10-36 Vehicle Care

A. Claw in Notch

B. Correct Installation

C. Incorrect Installation

6. Put the blade assembly pivot inthe wiper arm hook. Pull up untilthe pivot locking tab locks in thehook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper armand blade assembly onto thewindshield.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatthe vehicle be taken to the dealerfor service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑39.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Headlamps

A. Low-Beam Headlamp/DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL)

B. High-Beam Headlamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

2. Reach in and access the bulbsockets from inside the enginecompartment.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

4. Unplug the electrical connectorfrom the old bulb by releasingthe clips on the bulb socket.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out.

6. Push the new bulb straight inuntil it clicks to secure it.

7. Plug in the electrical connectorto the new bulb socket.

8. Push the bulb socket straight inand turn it clockwise to secure itin the headlamp assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

A. Stoplamp/Taillamp

B. Turn Signal/Taillamp

C. Back‐up Lamp


10-38 Vehicle Care

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgateon page 2‑8.

2. Remove the two rear lampassembly screws near thetailgate latch.

3. Pull the lamp assembly awayfrom the vehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

5. Holding the socket, pull the oldbulb straight out to release itfrom the socket.

6. Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it clicks.

7. Insert the bulb socket into thetaillamp assembly and turn itclockwise to secure.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assemblyand tighten the screws.

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)To replace the CHMSL bulb:

1. Remove the two screws and liftoff the lamp assembly from thevehicle.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and remove itfrom the lamp assembly.

3. Holding the socket, pull the bulbto release it from the socket.

4. Push the new bulb into thesocket until it clicks.

5. Insert the bulb socket into thelamp assembly and turn itclockwise to secure.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly andtighten the screws.


Vehicle Care 10-39

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Reach under the rear bumper forthe bulb socket.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb socket out of the connector.

3. Pull the old bulb straight outfrom the bulb socket.

4. Push the new bulb straight inuntil it clicks to secure it.

5. Reach under the rear bumper toreinstall the bulb socket into theconnector.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto secure it to the connector.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Cargo Lamp andCenter High‐MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

912LL

License Plate Bulb W5W LL

Headlamps

High-beam 9005

Low-beam/DaytimeRunningLamp (DRL)

9006

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Parking/Front TurnSignal

3757KA

Parking Lamp(Inboard) 3157A

Stoplamp, RearTurn Signal,Taillamp, andBack‐up Lamp

3057

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on theroad and do not have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick somefeature of the vehicle that you canget along without— like the radio orcigarette lighter— and use its fuse,if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.


Vehicle Care 10-41

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

The engine compartment fuse blockis located on the driver side of theengine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

To remove the cover, push in on thetab on the end of the cover and lift.To reinstall the cover, line up the taband push down on the cover untilthe tab clicks into place.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


10-42 Vehicle Care

The trailer brake relay is located onthe bottom side of the batteryharness.

Fuses Usage

O2 SNSR

Oxygen Sensors,Air InjectionReactor (AIR)Relay

A/CAir ConditioningControl Head,Power Seats

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

Fuses Usage

ABS

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS),ABS Module,Four‐Wheel Drive,Gravity Sensor

ABS 1 ABS 1 (ABS Logic)

ABS 2 ABS 2 (ABS Pump)

AUX PWR 1 Accessory Power 1

AUX PWR 2 Accessory Power 2

BCK/UP Back-up Lights

BLWRClimateControl Fan

CLSTR Cluster

CNSTRVENT

Fuel Canister VentSolenoid

CRUISE

Cruise ControlSwitch, InsideRearview Mirror,Transfer CaseControl Module,Brake Switch,Clutch Disable

Fuses Usage

DR/LCK Power DoorLocks (If Equipped)

DRLDaylight RunningLamps

ERLS

Mass AirFlow (MAF)Sensor, Can PurgeSolenoid, AirInjectorReactor (AIR)Relay

ETC Electronic ThrottleControl (ETC)

FOG/LAMPFog Lamps(If Equipped)

FRTPRK LAMP

Front Park/TurnLamps, Driver andPassenger SidePower WindowSwitches Lighting

FRT/AXLE Front Axle Actuator

FSCMFuel SystemControl Module


Vehicle Care 10-43

Fuses Usage

BACKUPLAMP

Backup Lamp

HORN Horn

HTD/SEATHeated Seat(If Equipped)

IGN

Ignition, ClutchStarter Switch,Neutral SafetyBack‐Up Switch,Ignition Coils 1‐5,Air ConditioningRelay

INJ Injectors

LT HDLPDriver SideHeadlamp

PCMBPower ControlModule (PCM) B

PCMIPower ControlModule (PCM)

PWR/SEATPower Seat CircuitBreaker(If Equipped)

Fuses Usage

PWR/WNDW Power Windows(If Equipped)

RDO Radio

REARPRK LAMP

Rear ParkingLamp 1, PassengerSide Taillamp,License PlateLamps

REAR PRKLAMP2

Driver Side RearTaillamp,Passenger SideAirbag IndicatorLighting,Instrument PanelDimming Power(2WD/4WD switchlighting)

RT HDLPPassenger SideHeadlamp

RVCRegulated VoltageControl

S/ROOF Not Used

Fuses Usage

STOP Stop Lamps

STRTRStarter SolenoidRelay

TBCTruck BodyController

TCMTransmissionControl Module

TCCMTransfer CaseControl Module

TRAILERBRAKE

Trailer Brake

TRANS TransmissionSolenoid

TRN/HAZRD FRT

Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/CargoLamps/Mirrors

TRN/HAZRDREAR

Rear Turn/HazardLights

VSES/STOPVehicle StabilityEnhancementSystem/Stop


10-44 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

WPR Wiper

WSWWiper/WasherSwitch

Relays Usage

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

Backup Lamp Backup Lamp

BEAM SEL Beam Selection

DRLDaylight RunningLamps

FOG/LAMPFog Lamps(If Equipped)

HDLP Headlamps

HORN Horn

IGN 3 HVAC

Ignition 3, ClimateControl, ClimateControl HeadFuse, PowerSeat Fuse

Relays Usage

PRK/LAMPFront ParkingLamp Fuse, RearParking Lamps

PWR/TRN

Powertrain,Electronic ThrottleControl Fuse,OxygenSensor Fuse

RAP

RetainedAccessoryPower (PowerWindow Fuse,Wiper/WasherSwitch Fuse)

RUN/CRNK

Run/Crank, AirbagSystem Fuse,Cruise ControlFuse, IgnitionFuse, Back-UpLamps, ABS Fuse,Front Axle, PCM-1,Injectors Fuse,TransmissionFuse, ERLS

Relays Usage

STRTR Starter Relay (PCMRelay)

VSESVehicle StabilityEnhancementSystem

WPR Wipers (On/Off)

WPR 2 Wiper 2 (High/Low)

Miscellaneous Usage

A/C CLTCHDiode — AirConditioning,Clutch

MEGA FUSE Mega Fuse

WPRDiode —Wiper


Vehicle Care 10-45

2.9L and 3.7L


10-46 Vehicle Care

5.3L

Fuses Usage

A Trailer Park Lamp

BCommunicationInterface Module

Fuses Usage

C

SupplementalInflatable RestraintSystem, Sensingand DiagnosticModule

Fuses Usage

D Trailer AuxiliaryMaxi-Fuse


Vehicle Care 10-47

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑19.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact— such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑65.


Vehicle Care 10-49

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not be

driven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If the vehicle has acompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑85 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑69.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑54.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.


10-50 Vehicle Care

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown in

item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑54.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑19.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑19.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑19.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑19.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑54 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑19.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑62.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determinedby tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑65.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑19.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑19.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑19. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe spare tire. If the vehicle hasa compact spare tire, it shouldbe at 420 kPa (60 psi). SeeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑85 and Full-Size SpareTire on page 10‑86 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).


Vehicle Care 10-55

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with P235/50R18 size tiresrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressure to themaximum inflation pressure shownon the tire sidewall, or 241 kPa(35 psi), whichever is lower. See theexample following. Return the tiresto the recommended cold tireinflation pressure when high-speeddriving has ended. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑19 and TirePressure on page 10‑54.

Example:

The maximum load and inflationpressure is molded on the tiresidewall, in small letters, nearthe rim flange. It will readsomething like this: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

For this example, set the inflationpressure for high‐speed driving at241 kPa (35 psi).


10-56 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑57 foradditional information.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑22 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly on your vehicle, excludingthe spare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in your tiresand transmit the tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in thevehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.

If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑19.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. For additional informationand details about the DIC operation

and displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑20 and TireMessages on page 5‑27.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑19, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location on yourvehicle. Also see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑54.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Your vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑60, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑60 and Tires onpage 10‑47.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the vehicle's tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off once theTPMS sensor matching processis performed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑62.


Vehicle Care 10-59

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There is one minute to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocedure is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Turn the exterior lamp switchfrom AUTO to OFF four timeswithin three seconds. A doublehorn chirp will sound and theTPMS low tire warning lightstarts flashing. The double hornchirp and flashing TPMSwarning light indicates the TPMSmatching process has started.

The TPMS warning light shouldcontinue flashing throughout thematching procedure. The LOWTIRE message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5.


10-60 Vehicle Care

9. After hearing the confirming hornchirp for the driver side rear tire,check to see if the TPMS low tirewarning light and the DIC LOWTIRE messages have turned off.If yes, the TPMS sensors havebeen relearned. Turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK/OFF.

If the low tire warning light andthe SERV TPM message on theDIC are on after completingStep 5 for the driver side reartire, the sensor relearn processhas not been successful. Turnthe ignition to LOCK/OFF andrepeat the matching processbeginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑62 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑67.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑54and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑19.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑57.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.


10-62 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators.

See Tire Inspection on page 10‑60and Tire Rotation on page 10‑60 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. When replacement tires areneeded, GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.


Vehicle Care 10-63

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM's TPCSpec number is molded onto thetire's sidewall near the tire size.If the tires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec number willbe followed by MS for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 10‑48 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing all thetires at the same time. Uniform treaddepth on all tires will help tomaintain the performance of thevehicle. Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. See TireInspection on page 10‑60 and TireRotation on page 10‑60 forinformation on proper tire rotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must be replacedwith a tire that does not have a TPCSpec number, make sure they arethe same size, load range, speedrating, and construction (radial) asthe original tires.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low‐pressure warning ifnon‐TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑56.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel indicates the originalequipment tires on the vehicle. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑19,for the label location and moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑62 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑4 foradditional information.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporary

use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑69 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

If your vehicle has P215/70R16,P235/75R16, P265/70R17, P235/50R18, or P265/65R18 size tires,do not use tire chains. They candamage your vehicle becausethere is not enough clearance.Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage tothe brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damagedby the tire chains could cause youto lose control of your vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust,or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle. Do notspin the vehicle's wheels.

If you do find traction devices thatwill fit, install them on the reartires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tiresize other than P215/70R16, P235/75R16, P265/70R17, P235/50R18,or P265/65R18 use tire chainsonly where legal and only whenyou must. Use chains that are theproper size for your tires. Installthem on the tires of the rear axle.Do not use chains on the tires ofthe front axle. Tighten them astightly as possible with theends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chainmanufacturer's instructions.If you can hear the chainscontacting your vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until itstops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage your vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-69

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.


10-70 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, be sure thetransfer case is in a drivegear– not in N (Neutral).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

A. Wing Nut

B. Storage Bag and Tools

The tools are located under the rightfront passenger seat.

1. Move the seat all the wayforward to locate the tool bag.

2. Turn the wing nut (A)counterclockwise to release thetool bag (B).

Put the tools to the side while youaccess the jack and wheel blocks.

Regular/Extended Cab

For regular and extended cabvehicles, the jack and wheel blocksare located under the cover at thecenter of the vehicle behind thefront seats.

1. Turn the wing nut on the covercounterclockwise to remove it.

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut

D. Jack Knob

2. Lower the jack (A) by turning thejack knob (D) counterclockwiseto release the jack (A) from thebracket.

3. Turn the wing nut (C)counterclockwise to release thewheel blocks (B).


10-72 Vehicle Care

Crew Cab

For crew cab models, the jack andwheel blocks are located under thedriver side rear seat.

1. Reach under the rear seat toaccess the jack and wheelblocks.

2. Turn the jack knobcounterclockwise to lower thejack all the way and release itfrom the bracket.

3. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer.

Use the jack handle extensions andthe wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.

A. Jack Handle Extensions

B. Jack

C. Jack Handle

D. Wheel Wrench

E. Wheel Blocks


Vehicle Care 10-73

1. Assemble the wheel wrench, thejack handle extensions, and thejack handle, as shown.

2. Insert the chiseled end of thejack handle at a slight anglethrough the hole in the rearbumper and into thefunnel-shaped guide.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

If the spare tire does not lower tothe ground, the secondary latchis engaged causing the tire notto lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 10‑82.

4. Tilt the retainer when the tire hasbeen lowered, and slide it up thecable so it can be pulled upthrough the wheel opening.

5. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Use the following pictures andinstructions to remove the flat tireand raise the vehicle.

A. Jack Handle Extensions

B. Jack

C. Jack Handle

D. Wheel Wrench

E. Wheel Blocks

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑69 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the center cap byplacing the chisel end of thewheel wrench into one of theslots on the wheel and gentlyprying the cap out.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts. Do not removethe wheel nuts yet.


Vehicle Care 10-75

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

Front Position

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown, for the frontor rear locations.

Front Position

If the flat tire is on the front ofthe vehicle, position the jack tothe rear of the front tire in thepocket off of the frame.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Rear Position

If the flat tire is on the rear,position the jack under the rearaxle and get as close aspossible to the shock absorber.

5. Make sure the jack head ispositioned so that the rear axleis resting securely between thegrooves that are on thejack head.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to fitunder the wheel well.

7. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.


Vehicle Care 10-77

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

9. Install the spare tire.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel. Tighteneach wheel nut by hand. Thenuse the wheel wrench totighten the nuts until the wheelis held against the hub.

Front Position


10-78 Vehicle Care

Rear Position

11. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

after replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown, by turning the wheelwrench clockwise.

Reinstall the center cap when theregular wheel and tire arereinstalled. Place the cap on thewheel and tap it into place until it isflush with the wheel. The cap onlygoes on one way. Be sure to line upthe tab on the center cap with theindentation on the wheel.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminumwheel with a flat tire under yourvehicle for an extended period oftime or with the valve stempointing up can damage thewheel. Always stow the wheelwith the valve stem pointingdown and have the wheel/tirerepaired as soon as possible.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.

1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle with the valvestem pointed down.

2. Tilt the retainer downward andthrough the center wheelopening. Make sure the retaineris fully seated across theunderside of the wheel.

3. Assemble the wheel wrench, thejack handle extensions, and thejack handle, as shown.


10-80 Vehicle Care

4. Insert the chiseled end of thejack handle at a slight anglethrough the hole in the rearbumper and into thefunnel-shaped guide.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the tire partway up. Make sure the retaineris seated in the wheel openingand the valve stem ispointed down.

Continue raising the tire, watchto make sure it does not getcaught on anything on theunderbody. If the tire does getcaught, loosen two or three turnsand push and pull the tire andthen retighten.

Repeat this procedure as manytimes as needed to ensureproper stowage.

6. When the tire is properly seatedto the underbody, continueturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), andthen try to turn (B) the tire. If thetire moves, check to make surethe tire valve stem is pointingdown, then use the wheelwrench to loosen and thentighten the cable.


Vehicle Care 10-81

To store the tools:

1. Return the tools to thestorage bag.

2. Attach the storage bag to thefloor under the frontpassenger seat.

3. Reinstall the wing nut to securethe bag to the vehicle.

To store the jack and wheel blocks:

Regular/Extended Cab

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut

1. Install the wheel blocks (B) first.

2. Turn the wing nut (C) clockwiseto secure the wheel blocks to thevehicle.

3. Lower the jack (A) all the wayand insert the jack into thebracket.

4. Raise the jack by turning thehandle clockwise to secure thejack within the bracket.

5. Put the cover in position andinsert and tighten the wing nut tosecure it.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Crew Cab

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut

1. Attach the wheel blocks (B) tothe jack (A) with the wheel blockretainer and the wing nut (C).

2. Reinstall the jack and wheelblock assembly in the mountingbracket. Make sure to positionthe holes in the base of the jackonto the pins in the mountingbracket.

3. Turn the handle to raise the jackuntil it is secure, but do notovertighten the jack in thebracket.

Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has an underbody‐mounted tire hoist assembly thathas a secondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the spare tire fromsuddenly falling off the vehicle. Forthe secondary latch to work, thespare must be installed with thevalve stem pointing down. See“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑71.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

1. Check under the vehicle to see ifthe cable end fitting is visible.

2. If the cable end fitting is notvisible, proceed to Step 6.

If it is visible, first try to tightenthe cable by turning the wheelwrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.The cable cannot beovertightened.


Vehicle Care 10-83

3. Loosen the cable by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwisethree or four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at leasttwo times. If the spare tirelowers to the ground, continuewith Step 5 under “Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools” underTire Changing on page 10‑71.

5. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise untilapproximately 15 cm (6 in) ofcable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on theirshortest ends, with the backsfacing each other.

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

7. Place the bottom edge of thejack (A) on the wheel blocks (B).Separate the wheel blocks sothat the jack is balancedsecurely.

8. Attach the jack handle,extension, and wheel wrench tothe jack and place it, with thewheel blocks, under the vehicletowards the front of the rearbumper. Position the center liftpoint of the jack under thewheel.

9. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the jack until itlifts the tire.

10. Continue raising the jack untilthe tire stops moving upwardand is held firmly in place.


10-84 Vehicle Care

11. Remove the jack handle andinsert the hoist end of theextension through the hole inthe rear bumper.

Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise one turn oruntil the wheel retainerassembly is disengaged.

12. Reinsert the jack handle intothe jack. Lower the jack byturning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jack oris hanging by the cable.

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handlefrom the jack and carefullyremove the jack. Use one handto push against the spare whilefirmly pulling the jack out fromunder the spare tire with theother hand.

If the spare tire is hanging fromthe cable, insert the hoist endof the extension into the hoistshaft hole in the bumper andturn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare the rest of the way.

14. Tilt the tire retainer at the endof the cable and pull it throughthe wheel opening. Pull the tireout from under the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-85

15. If the cable is hanging underthe vehicle, turn the wheelwrench clockwise to raise thecable.

Have the hoist assemblyinspected as soon as you can.A spare or flat tire can not bestored using the hoistassembly until it has beenreplaced.

To continue changing the flat tire,see “Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” under TireChanging on page 10‑71.

Compact Spare TireYour vehicle may have a compactspare tire. Although the compactspare tire was fully inflated whenyour vehicle was new, it can lose airover time. Check the inflationpressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the compactspare tire is installed on thevehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have the flattire repaired and/or replaced. Youcould damage the vehicle, andthe repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Neveruse four-wheel drive when thecompact spare tire is installed onthe vehicle.

After installing the compact spareon your vehicle, you should stop assoon as possible and make sureyour vehicle's spare tire is correctlyinflated. The compact spare is madeto perform well at speeds up to62 mph (100 km/h) for distances upto 500 miles (804 km). For heavypayloads or towing, and for lowtraction or four-wheel-driveconditions, repair or replace thefull-size tire. Of course, it is best toreplace your vehicle's spare with afull-size tire as soon as you can.

The spare tire will last longer and bein good shape in case you need itagain.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use your compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix your compact sparetire or wheel with other wheels ortires. They will not fit. Keep yourspare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Full-Size Spare TireYour vehicle may have a full-sizespare tire, which, when new, wasfully inflated. A spare tire may loseair over time, so check its inflationpressure regularly. See TirePressure on page 10‑54 andVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑19for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle.For instruction on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” and“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑71.

Your vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on your vehicle.This spare was developed for useon your vehicle, so it is alright todrive on it. If your vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed, keep thevehicle in two-wheel drive.

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and a differentsize spare tire is installed, do notdrive in four-wheel drive until theflat tire is repaired and/orreplaced. The vehicle could bedamaged and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the warranty.Never use four-wheel drive whena different size spare tire isinstalled on the vehicle.

After installing the spare tire on yourvehicle, you should stop as soon aspossible and make sure the spare iscorrectly inflated. The spare tire ismade to perform well at speeds upto 62 mph (100 km/h) for distancesup to 500 miles (804 km). For heavypayloads or towing, and for lowtraction or four-wheel-driveconditions, repair or replace thefull-size tire. Have the damaged orflat road tire repaired or replaced assoon as you can and installed backonto your vehicle. This way, thespare tire will be available in caseyou need it again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑30.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12‐volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start your

vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If you have a four-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in Neutral.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.


10-88 Vehicle Care

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on the othervehicle. Your vehicle has aremote positive (+) and a remotenegative (−) jump startingterminal. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon the terminal locations.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the batteries haveenough water. You do not needto add water to the ACDelco®

battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least 45 cm(18 inches) away from the deadbattery, but not near engineparts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks gettingback to the battery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-91

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


10-92 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground. Two-wheel-drive

transmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure todinghy tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle.

2. Put an automatic transmissionin P (Park) or a manualtransmission in 1 (First).

3. Turn the engine off and firmly setthe parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑45.

4. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

{ WARNING

Shifting a full‐timefour‐wheel‐drive vehicle'stransfer case into N (Neutral) cancause the vehicle to roll even ifthe automatic transmission is inP (Park) or the manualtransmission is in any gear. Youor others could be injured. Makesure the parking brake is firmlyset before the transfer case isshifted to N (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive on page 10‑30.


Vehicle Care 10-93

6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand remove the key— the frontwheels will still turn.

7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.

After towing see “Shifting Out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 10‑30.

If the vehicle being towed will not bestarted or driven for six weeks ormore, remove the battery cable fromthe negative terminal (post) of thebattery to prevent the battery fromdraining.

Dolly Towing

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Two‐Wheel‐DriveVehicles

Notice: If a two-wheel drivevehicle is towed with the rearwheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Nevertow the vehicle with the rearwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with the rear wheels onthe ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drivevehicle, the vehicle must be towedwith the rear wheels on the dolly.See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)” later in this section formore information.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Four-Wheel-DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Put an automatic transmission inP (Park) or a manualtransmission in 1 (First).

4. Turn the engine off and firmly setthe parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑45.

{ WARNING

Shifting a full‐time four‐wheel‐drive vehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the automatictransmission is in P (Park) or themanual transmission is in anygear. You or others could beinjured. Make sure the parkingbrake is firmly set before thetransfer case is shifted toN (Neutral).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.


7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.


After towing, see “Shifting Out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 10‑30.

If the vehicle being towed will not bestarted or driven for six weeks ormore, remove the battery cable fromthe negative terminal (post) of thebattery to prevent the battery fromdraining.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround) – Two‐Wheel‐DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a two-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑45.

4. Put an automatic transmission inP (Park) or a manualtransmission in 1 (First).


6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.


If the vehicle being towed willnot be started or driven forsix weeks or more, remove thebattery cable from the negativeterminal (post) of the battery toprevent the battery fromdraining.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround) – Four‐Wheel‐DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑45.


10-96 Vehicle Care

4. Put an automatic transmissionin P (Park) or a manualtransmission in 1 (First).


6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

{ WARNING

Shifting a full‐timefour‐wheel‐drive vehicle'stransfer case into N (Neutral) cancause the vehicle to roll even ifthe automatic transmission is inP (Park) or the manualtransmission is in any gear. Youor others could be injured. Makesure the parking brake is firmlyset before the transfer case isshifted to N (Neutral).



If the vehicle being towed willnot be started or driven forsix weeks or more, remove thebattery cable from the negativeterminal (post) of the battery toprevent the battery fromdraining.

After towing, see “Shifting Out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 10‑30.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint, metal,or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.


Vehicle Care 10-97

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can

damage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.


10-98 Vehicle Care

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if theyare worn or damaged. Damage canbe caused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-99

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, andsteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.


10-100 Vehicle Care

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. To preventoverspray, apply all cleaners directlyto the cleaning cloth. Cleanersshould be removed quickly. Neverallow cleaners to remain on thesurface being cleaned for extendedperiods of time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doorsand windows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 dropsper 3.78L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.


Vehicle Care 10-101

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed by only clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.


10-102 Vehicle Care

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup‐to‐date tools and equipmentfor fast and accurate diagnostics.Many dealers have extendedevening and Saturday hours,courtesy transportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Normal are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑19.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑53.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Severe are for vehiclesthat are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑10.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑54.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑60.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑60.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑10 and EngineOil Life System on page 10‑12.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑19.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.



. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑96. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑34.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑54.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑60.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑17.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑96.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑19.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑96.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑32.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑33.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑33.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑34.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

d) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑18.

e) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

d) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑18.

e) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommended thatyour dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.



Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.



Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑99 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑96.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking Brake Cable GuidesChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.




Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 89021806, in Canada 89021807).

Hydraulic Clutch SystemHydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. 12345347, in Canada 10953517) orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front and Rear AxleSAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer CaseSynchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 12345349, inCanada 10953465).

Rear Driveline Center Spline andUniversal Joints

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.




Constant Velocity Universal Joint Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges, Body DoorHinge Pins, Liftgate Hinge andLinkage, and Fuel Door Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Pointsand Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Weatherstrip SqueaksSynthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15942429 —

Engine Oil Filter

2.9L L4 Engine 19210283 PF46

3.7L L5 Engine 19210285 PF61

5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

2.9L L4 and 3.7L L5 Engines 12625058 41-103

5.3L V8 Engine 12609877 41-985

Wiper Blades

Driver Side — 55 cm (22 in) 10389562 —

Passenger Side — 48 cm (19 in) 10389563 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate conversion capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

2.9L L4 Engine 9.8 L 10.4 qt

3.7L L5 Engine 10.0 L 10.6 qt

5.3L V8 Engine 13.0 L 13.7 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.9L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.7L L5 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

5.3L V8 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank 74 L 19.5 gal


Technical Data 12-3

Capacities and Specifications (cont'd)

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Transmission

Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 4.7 L 5.0 qt

Manual– Rear-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill) 2.2 L 2.3 qt

Manual– Four-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill) 2.3 L 2.4 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Type VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.9L L4 9 AutomaticManual

1.01 mm (0.040 in)

3.7L L5 E Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

5.3L V8 P Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.9L and 3.7L Engines

5.3L Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-15

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-20OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.



You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).



Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.However, we recognize that despite

the good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address



See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Chevrolet encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].



Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0811

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0811

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8190

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Manage your vehicle (U.S.) atchevrolet.com. Click on“Owners,” then “Manage MyChevrolet/Owners Login.”

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Chevrolet dealer locator for

service nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.



Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ. Contact Us

Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.



General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.



Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.



. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicle isautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Theservices are available at no costunder the terms and conditions ofthe program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not part of,or included, in the coverageprovided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving the vehiclewithin your city of residence or onany passable road in Mexico, theUnited States, and Canada.Services are subject to thelimitations described in the followingpages. Program coverage varies bycountry.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice for thevehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at the endof its term, contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center at01-800-466-0800.

Services Provided. Flat Tire Change : If unable to

change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedChevrolet dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery :Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.



. Lock-Out Service : Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start : Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages :Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls : Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance : Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers for Chevroletdealers.

. Emergency Towing : Tow to thenearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involved in anaccident during the commissionof a crime, administrativeviolation, or breach of trafficregulations, RoadsideAssistance will not provideservice. When the vehicle is not

accessible to be towed, allmaneuvers required to access itwill be at the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in another cityoutside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest Chevrolet dealerdue to scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.

. *Trip Interruption : This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling and it isnot possible for the nearestChevrolet dealership to repairthe vehicle the same day,requiring the vehicle to stay atthe dealership for a night ormore. If this happens, in additionto the previously listed servicesand prior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits ofexisting Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time ofservice.

Roadside Assistancewill coordinate hotelaccommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.



A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: Ifyou prefer to continue your tripto the intended destination orreturn to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by RoadsideAssistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for Vehicle PickUp : Transportation to pick upyour vehicle after repairs arecomplete. Once the dealer hasreported that the vehicle hasbeen repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated by youto collect your vehicle at thedealership's location if you or thedesignated person are not in thesame town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not provided forU.S. or Canada residents. Allservices provided in the U.S. andCanada are at the owner's expenseand will be reimbursed by RoadsideAssistance.

Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for thefollowing:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization situations

due to a major force orunforeseen circumstances, suchas natural phenomena of anextraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver of thevehicle or third parties. Thismeans any occurrence thatcauses physical injury to theoccupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.



. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived from theservices provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Chevrolet dealer thatis nearest to the temporarystorage facility for the disabledvehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costsare not covered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance services are ofno cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which are listedpreviously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0800

United States

1-866-466-8901

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Chevrolet reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation througha friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle

Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies provide

reduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.



If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number.

. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑26.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.



If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.



Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-17Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Airbag System (cont'd)When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-22AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 5-11Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Audio SystemChime Level Adjustment . . . . . . . 5-6Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-14Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-34Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-15

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-26Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-38

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 10-36, 10-37License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-39Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-53Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-12CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-33

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-43


INDEX i-3

Child Restraints (cont'd)Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-54, 3-57, 3-59Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-15Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-18

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-4

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-15Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-20

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-19Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-14If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-17Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont'd)Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41


Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Engine (cont'd)Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Cooling System Messages . . .5-24Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-35Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-20Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-102FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-13Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-30, 9-40Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31


INDEX i-5

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-53Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53Requirements, California . . . . .9-53System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-86FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41


GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-19High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-55Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-14Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5


i-6 INDEX

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-48LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

LightingExit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-15Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 5-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-50


INDEX i-7

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-24Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-26Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Mirrors (cont'd)Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

NNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-35Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6


i-8 INDEX

OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-18

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-34

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-34Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-27

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-31Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-14

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-22Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8, 3-9Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16


INDEX i-9

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-34Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-20

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-19General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Ride Control SystemsLimited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-50Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-20Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-18

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-19General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-9Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-82Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . 3-54, 3-57, 3-59

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10


i-10 INDEX

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-32Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-DeterrentSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-57Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55


INDEX i-11

Tires (cont'd)Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-56Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Secondary Latch System . . . 10-82Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-67When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-58Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-57Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-91Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-47Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-50TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19


i-12 INDEX

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-41Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-34

2012 chevy colorado owners manual baltimore, maryland

Automotive

vehicle care

vehicle features

andspecific vehicle

vehicle security

vehicle messages

vehicle data12

vehicle checks

vehicle identification